Foreword - klibo.de · Foreword Thank you for choosing Powtran Technology PI9000 series high...
Transcript of Foreword - klibo.de · Foreword Thank you for choosing Powtran Technology PI9000 series high...
1
Foreword
Thank you for choosing Powtran Technology PI9000 series high performance
frequency inverter. This product made by POWTRAN based on years of experience in
professional production and sale, and designed for variety of industrial machinery, fan
and water pump drive unit and IF heavy-dury grinding unit.
For any problem when using this product, pls contact with the local dealer or
POWTRAN company directly, our people will be happy to serve you.
The end-users should hold this manual, keep it well for future maintenance &
care, and other application occasions. For any problem within the warranty period,
please fill out the warranty card and fix it to our authorized dealer.
The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice. To obtain
the latest information, please visit our website.
For more information, please visit http://www.powtran.com.
POWTRAN
July, 2015
2
Table of contents
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions .................................................. 1
1-1. Inspection after unpacking .......................................................... 1
1-1-1. Instructions on nameplate ................................................... 1
1-1-2. Model designation .............................................................. 1
1-2. Safety precautions ....................................................................... 2
1-3. Precautions .................................................................................. 3
1-4. Scope of applications .................................................................. 5
Chapter 2 Standard specifications .................................................................. 6
2-1. Technical specifications .............................................................. 6
2-2. Main circuit terminal screw specification ................................. 10
2-3. Technic standard ....................................................................... 11
Chapter 3 Keyboard...................................................................................... 14
3-1. Keyboard description ................................................................ 14
3-2. Keyboard Indicators .................................................................. 14
3-3. Description of operation panel keys.......................................... 14
3-4. Keyboard display letters and numbers correspond ................... 15
3-4-1. Examples of parameter settings ........................................ 15
3-4-2. The way to read parameters in various status ................... 17
3-4-3. Password settings .............................................................. 17
3-4-4. Motor parameter auto tunning .......................................... 17
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning ................................................... 18
4-1. Operating environment ............................................................. 18
4-2. Installation direction and space ................................................. 18
4-3. Wiring diagram ......................................................................... 18
4-3-1. 11kW following wiring diagram ....................................... 19
4-3-2. 11kW ~ 15kW wiring diagram ......................................... 21
4-3-3. 18.5kW ~ 355kW wiring diagram .................................... 23
4-4. Main circuit terminal (G type) .................................................. 25
4-4-1. PI9000 main circuit terminal ............................................ 25
4-4-2. Function description of main circuit terminal ................... 26
4-5. Control circuit terminals ........................................................... 26
4-5-1. Arrangement of control circuit terminals .......................... 26
4-5-2. Description of control circuit terminals ............................ 27
3
4-6. Wiring Precautions: .................................................................. 29
4-7. Spare Circuit ............................................................................. 30
4-8. Commissioning ......................................................................... 31
Chapter 5 Function parameter ...................................................................... 32
5-1. Menu grouping ......................................................................... 32
5-2. Function parameter description ................................................ 62
5-2-1. Basic monitoring parameters: d0.00-d0.41 ....................... 62
5-2-2. Basic function group: F0.00-F0.27 ................................... 65
5-2-3. Input terminals: F1.00-F1.46 ............................................ 72
5-2-4. Output terminals: F2.00-F2.19 ......................................... 82
5-2-5. Start and stop control: F3.00-F3.15 .................................. 86
5-2-6. V/F control parameters: F4.00-F4.14 ............................... 90
5-2-7. Vector control parameters: F5.00-F5.15 ........................... 93
5-2-8. Keyboard and display: F6.00-F6.19 ................................. 94
5-2-9. Auxiliary function: F7.00-F7.54 ....................................... 98
5-2-10. Fault and protection:F8.00-F8.35 ................................. 105
5-2-11. Communications parameters: F9.00-F9.07 ................... 110
5-2-12. Torque control parameters:FA.00-FA.07 ...................... 111
5-2-13. Control optimization parameters: Fb.00-Fb.09............. 112
5-2-14. Extended parameter:FC.00-FC.02 ................................ 114
5-2-15. Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting:E0.00-E0.11 ..... 114
5-2-16. Multi-stage command, simple PLC: E1.00-E1.51 ........ 116
5-2-17. PID function: E2.00-E2.32 ........................................... 120
5-2-18. Virtual DI、Virtual DO:E3.00-E3.21 ........................... 124
5-2-19. Motor parameters: b0.00-b0.35 .................................... 126
5-2-20. Function code management:y0.00-y0.04 ...................... 129
5-2-21. Fault query:y1.00-y1.30 ............................................... 131
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting ......................................................................... 134
6-1. Fault alarm and countermeasures ........................................... 134
6-2. EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) ................................... 138
6-2-1.Definition ........................................................................ 138
6-2-2.EMC standard .................................................................. 138
6-3. EMC directive ........................................................................ 138
6-3-1. Harmonic effect .............................................................. 138
4
6-3-2. Electromagnetic interference and installation precautions
............................................................................................................... 138
6-3-3. Remedies for the interferences from the surrounding
electromagnetic equipments to the inverter ........................................... 139
6-3-4. Remedies for the interferences from the inverter to the
surrounding electromagnetic equipments .............................................. 139
6-3-5. Remedies for leakage current ......................................... 139
6-3-6. Precautions on installing EMC input filter at the input end
of power supply ..................................................................................... 140
Chapter 7 Dimensions ................................................................................ 141
7-1. Dimensions ............................................................................. 141
7-1-1. Appearance and installation holes size ........................... 141
Chapter 8 Maintenance and repair .............................................................. 147
8-1. Inspection and Maintenance ................................................... 147
8-2. Parts for regular replacement .................................................. 147
8-3. Storage .................................................................................... 148
8-4. Capacitor ................................................................................. 148
8-4-1. Capacitor rebuilt ............................................................. 148
Chapter 9 Options ....................................................................................... 150
Chapter 10 Warranty ................................................................................... 161
Appendix I RS485 Communication protocol ............................................. 162
Appendix Ⅱ Description on proportion linkage function .......................... 172
Appendix Ⅲ How to use universal encoder expansion card ...................... 175
Appendix IV CAN bus communication card use description ..................... 178
IV-1.Overview ................................................................................ 178
IV-2-1 Mechanical installation modes ....................................... 178
IV-2-2 Terminal function ........................................................... 179
Appendix V Profibus-DP communication card use description ................. 180
V-1.Outline ..................................................................................... 180
V-2.Terminal function .................................................................... 180
Product Information Feedback ............................................................... - 182 -
1
第
十
章
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions
POWTRAN frequency inverters have been tested and inspected before leaving factory. After
purchasing, please check if its package is damaged due to careless transportation, and if the
specifications and model of the product are consistent with your order requirements. For any
problem, please contact your local authorized POWTRAN dealer or directly contact this company.
1-1.Inspection after unpacking
※ Check if that packing container contains this unit, one manual and one warranty card.
※ Check the nameplate on the side of the frequency inverter to ensure that the product you
have received is right the one you ordered.
1-1-1.Instructions on nameplate
POWER
INPUT
OUTPUT
DALIAN POWTRAN TECHNOLOGY CO.,LTD.
MODEL
7.5kW
AC 3PH 380V 50Hz/60Hz ± 10%
AC 0 17A 0 400Hz3PH 380V
PI9100 7R5G3
ZPB1A0100001
Diagram 1-1 Instructions on nameplate
1-1-2.Model designation
Type Code:A:Single IGBTB:Integrated intelligent
power module (omitted)
Powtran Inverter
Rated output capacity (● ● ●)
Example: 7R5: 7.5kW 132:132 kW
Function code (□)
General Type F: Light load
G: Standard load
Series Code
91:PI9100 series 93:PI9300 series
92:PI9200 series 94:PI9400 series Input Voltage Level
1: Single-phase 220V 2:Three-phase 220V
3:Three-phase 380V 4:Three-phase 480V
6: Three-phase 690V
Class Code:
0: Standard configuration
1: Special 1 configuration
2: Special 2 configuration
Version Number
0: Default (omitted)
1: Version upgrade
Derivative Code3:With MCU keyboard
Diagram 1-2 Model designaion
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions
2
第
十
章
1-2.Safety precautions
Safety precautions in this manual are divided into the following two categories:
Danger: the dangers caused by failure to perform required operation, may result in serious injury or even death;
Caution:the dangers caused by failure to perform required operation, may result in moderate
injury or minor injury, and equipment damage;
Process Type Explanation
Before
installation Danger
● When unpacking, if control system with water, parts missed
or component damaged are found, do not install! ● If packing list does not match the real name, do not install!
● Gently carry with care, otherwise there is the risk of damage
to equipment! ● Please do not use the damaged driver or the frequency
inverter with missed pieces, otherwise there is the risk of
injury! ● Do not use your hand to touch the control system
components, otherwise there is the risk of electrostatic
damage!
When
installing
Danger
● Please install the unit on the metal or flame retardant
objects; Away from combustible material. Failure to do so may cause a fire!
● Never twist the mounting bolts of the equipment
components, especially the bolt with the red mark!
Note
● Do not let the lead metalic foreign body fall into the driver.
Otherwise which may cause damage to the driver! ● Keep the driver installed in the place where less vibration,
avoid direct sunlight.
● When two or more converters are installed in a cabinet, please pay attention to the installation location, ensure the
good heat dissipation effect.
When
wiring Danger
● Must comply with this manual's guidance, any construction
shall be performed by a professional electrician, otherwise
there would be the unexpected risk ! ● A circuit breaker must be set between the inverter and the
power supply to separate them, otherwise it may cause a fire!
● Verify if power is a shut-down status before wiring, otherwise there is a risk of electric shock!
● The inverter shall be grounded correctly according to
standard specifications, otherwise there is a danger of electrical shock!
● Ensure that the distribution line meets the regional safety
standards of EMC requirements. The diameter of used wire shall refer to the recommendations of this manual. Otherwise
it may cause an accident!
● Never directly connect braking resistor to the DC bus P(+) and P(-) terminals. Otherwise it may cause a fire!
● Encoder must use the shielded wire, and the shielding layer
must ensure the single-ended grounded!
Before
energizing Note
● Please confirm whether the input power voltage is same as
the inverter rated voltage; wiring positions of power input terminals(R, S, T) and output terminals(U, V, W) are correct or
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions
3
not; and note that if there is a short circuit in the peripheral
circuit connected to driver, if the connected lines are tight,
otherwise it may cause damage to the driver!
● Do not need to perform withstand voltage test for any part of the inverter, this product has been tested before leaving
factory. Otherwise it may cause an accident!
Danger
● The inverter's cover plate must be closed before power on.
Otherwise it may cause an electric shock!
● Wiring of all external accessories must comply with the
guidance of this manual, please correctly wiring in accordance with the circuit connection methods described in this manual.
Otherwise it may cause an accident!
After
energizing Danger
● Do not open cover plate after energizing. Otherwise there is
a risk of electric shock!
● Do not touch the driver and peripheral circuits with wet
hands. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock!
● Do not touch any input and output terminals of the inverter.
Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock! ● The inverter automatically perform the safety testing for the
external strong electrical circuit in the early stages of
energizing, therefore never touch the driver terminals(U, V, W) or motor terminals, otherwise there is a risk of electric shock!
● If you need to identify the parameters, please pay attention
to the danger of injury during motor rotation. Otherwise it may cause an accident!
● Please do not change the inverter manufacturer parameters. Otherwise it may cause damage to this unit!
During
operation
Danger
● Do not touch the cooling fan and the discharge resistor to
feel the temperature. Otherwise it may cause burns! ● Non-professional personnel is not allowed to detect signal
when operating. Doing so may cause personal injury or
damage to this unit!
Note
● When the inverter is operating, you should avoid that
foreign body fall into this unit.Otherwise cause damage to this unit!
● Do not start/stop the driver by switching on/off contactor.
Otherwise cause damage to this unit!
When
maintaining Danger
● Do not perform repairs and maintenance for the live
electrical equipment. Otherwise there is a risk of electric shock!
● The repairs and maintenance task can be performed only
when the inverter bus voltage is lower than 36V,Otherwise, the
residual charge from capacitor would cause personal injury!
● Non-well-trained professional personnel is not allowed to
perform repairs and maintenance of inverter. Doing this may cause personal injury or damage to this unit!
● After replacing the inverter, parameter settings must be
redone, all pluggable plugs can be operated only in the case of powering off!
1-3.Precautions
No. Type Explanation
1 Motor Please perform motor insulation inspection for the first time use, re-use
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions
4
insulation
inspection
after leaving unused for a long time as well as regular check, in order to
prevent damage to the inverter because of the motor's winding
insulation failure. Wiring between motor and inverter shall be
disconnected, it is recommended that the 500V voltage type megger should be adopted and insulation resistance shall be not less than 5MΩ.
2
Motor
thermal protection
If the rated capacity of the selected motor does not match the inverter,
especially when the inverter rated power is greater than the motor rated
power, be sure to adjust the motor protection parameter values inside inverter or install thermal relay in the front of motor for motor
protection.
3 Run over power
frequency
The inverter output frequency rang is 0Hz to 3200Hz(Maz.vector control only supports 300Hz). If the user is required to run at 50Hz or
more, please consider the endurance of your mechanical devices.
4
Vibrations of
mechanical
device
Inverter output frequency may be encountered mechanical resonance
point of the load device, you can set jump frequency parameter inside
inverter to avoid the case.
5 Motor heat
and noise
The inverter output voltage is PWM wave that contains a certain
amount of harmonics, so the temperature rise, noise and vibration of motor show a slight higher than frequency power frequency operation.
6
Output side
with
piezoresistor or capacitor
for improving
power factor
The inverter output is PWM wave, if the piezoresistor for lightning
protection or the capacitor for improving power factor is installed in the output side, which easily cause the inverter instantaneous overcurrent
or even cause damage to the inverter. Please do not use.
7
Contactor or
switch used in
the inverter input/output
terminals
If contactor is installed between power supply and inverter, the
contactor is not allowed to start/stop the inverter. Necessarily need to
use the contactor to control the inverter start/stop, the interval should not be less than one hour. Frequent charging and discharging may
reduce the service life of the inverter capacitor. If the contactor or
switch is equipped between output terminals and motor, the inverter should be turned on/off without output status, otherwise which easily
lead to damage to the inverter module.
8
Use other
than the rated voltage
PI series inverter is not suitable for use beyond the allowable operating voltage described in this manual, which easily cause damage to the
parts inside inverter. If necessary, please use the corresponding
transformer to change voltage.
9
Never change 3-phase input
to 2-phase
input
Never change PI series 3-phase inverter to 2-phase one for application.
Otherwise it will lead to malfunction or damage to the inverter.
10
Lightning
surge
protection
The series inverter is equipped with lightning overcurrent protection
device, so it has the ability of self-protection to lightning induction. For
the area where lightning is frequent, user should also install the extra protection in the front of the inverter.
11
High altitude
and derating
application
When the inverter is used in areas over 1000m altitude, it is required to
reduce frequency because the thin air will decrease the cooling effect of
inverter. Please consult our technician for details on the application.
12 Special use
If the user need to use wiring other than the suggested wiring diagram
provided in this manual, such as common DC bus, please consult our
technician.
13 Precautions for scrap
disposal of
When electrolytic capacitors on the main circuit and printed circuit board as well as plastic parts are burned, it may produce toxic
gases.Please disposing as industrial waste.
Chapter 1.Inspection and safety precautions
5
the inverter
14 Adaptive
motor
1) Standard adaptive motor shall be four-pole asynchronous squirrel-cage induction motor or permanent magnet synchronous motor. Apart
from the said motors, please select the inverter according to the motor
rated current. 2) The cooling fan and the rotor shaft for non-inverter motor are
coaxially connected, the fan cooling effect is reduced when the
rotational speed is reduced, therefore, when the motor works in overheating occasions, a forced cooling fan should be retrofitted or
replace non-inverter motor with the inverter motor.
3) The inverter has built-in the adaptive motor standard parameters, according to the actual situation, please identify motor parameters or
accordingly modify the default values to try to meet the actual value,
otherwise it will operation affect and protection performance; 4) When short-circuit of cable or motor internal will activate the
inverter alarm, even bombing. Therefore, firstly perform insulation
short-circuit test for the initial installation of the motor and cable, routine maintenance often also need to perform such test. Note that the
cable or motor to be tested and the inverter shall be disconnected
completely when testing.
15 Others
1) Properly fix and lock the panel before powering on, so as to avoid
hurting the personal safety due to internal poor capacitors.
2) Do not touch internal circuit board and any parts after powering off and within five minutes after keyboard indicator lamp goes out, you
must use the instrument to confirm that internal capacitor has been
discharged fully, otherwise there is a danger of electric shock. 3) Body static electricity will seriously damage the internal MOS field-
effect transistors, etc., if there are not anti-static measures, do not touch
the printed circuit board and IGBT internal device with hand, otherwise
it may cause a malfunction.
4)The ground terminal of the inverter(E or ) shall be earthed firmly
according to the provisions of the National Electrical Safety and other
relevant standards. Do not shut down(power off) by pulling switch, and only cut off the power until the motor stopping operation.
5) It is required to add the optional input filter attachment so as to meet
CE standards
1-4.Scope of applications
This inverter is suitable for three-phase AC asynchronous motor and permanent magnet synchronous motor.
This inverter can only be used in those occasions recognized by this company, an unapproved
use may result in fire, electric shock, explosion and other accidents.
If the inverter is used in such equipments(e.g: equipments for lifting persons, aviation systems,
safety equipment, etc.) and its malfunction may result in personal injury or even death. In this case,
please consult the manufacturer for your application.
Only the well-trained personnel can be allowed to operate this unit, please
carefully read the instre1tions on safety, installation, operation and maintenance
before use. The safe operation of this unit depends on proper transport,
installation, operation and maintenance!
6
第
十
章
Chapter 2 Standard specifications
2-1.Technical specifications
Inverter
model
Rated
output
power
(kW)
Rated input
current(A)
Rated
output
current(A)
Adaptive
motor
(kW)
Base No.
1-phase 220V ±10%
PI9100-0R4G1 0.4 5.4 2.5 0.4 9S2
PI9100-0R7G1 0.75 8.2 4 0.75 9S2
PI9100-1R5G1 1.5 14 7 1.5 9S2
PI9100-2R2G1 2.2 23 10 2.2 9S3
PI9100-004G1 4.0 35 16 4.0 9S4
PI9200-5R5G1 5.5 50 25 5.5 9L1
3-phase 220V ±10%
PI9100-0R4G2 0.4 4.1 2.5 0.4 9S2
PI9100-0R7G2 0.75 5.3 4 0.75 9S2
PI9100-1R5G2 1.5 8.0 7 1.5 9S2
PI9100-2R2G2 2.2 11.8 10 2.2 9S3
PI9100-004G2 4.0 18.1 16 4 9S4
PI9200-5R5G2 5.5 28 25 5.5 9L1
PI9200-7R5G2 7.5 37.1 32 7.5 9L1
PI9200-011G2 11 49.8 45 11 9L2
PI9200-015G2 15.0 65.4 60 15.0 9L3
PI9200-018G2 18.5 81.6 75 18.5 9L3
PI9200-022G2 22.0 97.7 90 22.0 9L4
PI9200-030G2 30.0 122.1 110 30.0 9L4
PI9200-037G2 37.0 157.4 152 37.0 9L4
PI9200-045G2 45.0 185.3 176 45.0 9L5
PI9200-055G2 55.0 214 210 55.0 9L5
PI9200-075G2 75 307 304 75 9L6
3-phase 380V ±10%
PI9100-0R7G3 0.75 4.3 2.5 0.75 9S2
PI9100-1R5G3 1.5 5.0 3.8 1.5 9S2
PI9100-2R2G3 2.2 5.8 5.1 2.2 9S2
PI9100-004G3 4.0 10.5 9 4.0 9S3
PI9100-5R5G3 5.5 14.6 13 5.5 9S3
PI9100-7R5G3/
PI9100-011F3 7.5/11 20.5/26 17/25 7.5/11 9S4/9S4
PI9200-011G3/
PI9200-011F3/
PI9200-015F3
11/11/15 26/26/35 25/25/32 11/11/15 9L1/9L1/9L1
PI9200-015G3/ PI9200-018F3
15/18.5 35/38.5 32/37 15/18.5 9L1/9L1
PI9200-018G3/
PI9200-022F3 18.5/22 38.5/46.5 37/45 18.5/22 9L2/9L2
PI9200-022G3/ PI9200-030F3
22/30 46.5/62 45/60 22/30 9L2/9L2
PI9200-030G3/
PI9200-037F3 30/37 62/76 60/75 30/37 9L3/9L3
Chapter 2 Standard specification
7
PI9200-037G3/
PI9200-045F3 37/45 76/91 75/90 37/45 9L3/9L3
PI9200-045G3/
PI9200-055F3 45/55 91/112 90/110 45/55 9L4/9L4
PI9400-045G3/
PI9400-055F3 45/55 91/112 90/110 45/55 9P4/9P4
PI9200-055G3/ PI9200-075F3
55/75 112/157 110/150 55/75 9L4/9L4
PI9400-055G3/
PI9400-075F3 55/75 112/157 110/150 55/75 9P4/9P4
PI9200-075G3/ PI9200-093F3
75/93 157/180 150/176 75/93 9L4/9L4
PI9400-075G3/
PI9400-093F3 75/93 157/180 150/176 75/93 9P5/9P5
PI9200-093G3/
PI9200-110F3 93/110 180/214 176/210 93/110 9L5/9L5
PI9400-093G3/
PI9400-110F3 93/110 180/214 176/210 93/110 9P5/9P5
PI9200-110G3/
PI9200-132F3 110/132 214/256 210/253 110/132 9L5/9L5
PI9400-110G3/ PI9400-132F3
110/132 214/256 210/253 110/132 9P6/9P6
PI9200-132G3/
PI9200-160F3 132/160 256/307 253/304 132/160 9L6/9L6
PI9400-132G3/ PI9400-160F3
132/160 256/307 253/304 132/160 9P6/9P6
PI9200-160G3/
PI9200-187F3 160/187 307/345 304/340 160/187 9L6/9L6
PI9400-160G3/
PI9400-187F3 160/187 307/345 304/340 160/187 9P6/9P6
PI9300-187G3/
PI9300-200F3 187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9C1/9C1
PI9300-187G3/
PI9300-200F3 187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9C2/9C2
PI9300-200G3/ PI9300-220F3
200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9C1/9C1
PI9300-200G3/
PI9300-220F3 200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9C2/9C2
PI9400-187G3/ PI9400-200F3
187/200 345/385 340/380 187/200 9P7/9P7
PI9400-200G3/
PI9400-220F3 200/220 385/430 380/426 200/220 9P7/9P7
PI9300-220G3/
PI9300-250F3 220/250 430/468 426/465 220/250 9C1/9C2
PI9300-220G3/
PI9300-250F3 220/250 430/468 426/465 220/250 9C2/9C2
PI9400-220G3/
PI9400-250F3 220/250 430/468 426/465 220/250 9P7/9P7
PI9300-250G3/ PI9300-280F3
250/280 468/525 465/520 250/280 9C3/9C3
PI9300-280G3/
PI9300-315F3 280/315 525/590 520/585 280/315 9C3/9C3
PI9300-315G3/ 315/355 590/665 585/650 315/355 9C3/9C3
Chapter 2 Standard specifications
8
PI9300-355F3
PI9300-355G3/ PI9300-400F3
355/400 665/785 650/725 355/400 9C3/9C3
3-phase 480V ±10%
PI9100-0R7G4 0.75 4.1 2.5 0.75 9S2
PI9100-1R5G4 1.5 4.9 3.7 1.5 9S2
PI9100-2R2G4 2.2 5.7 5.0 2.2 9S2
PI9100-004G4 4.0 9.4 8 4.0 9S3
PI9100-5R5G4 5.5 12.5 11 5.5 9S3
PI9100-7R5G4/
PI9100-011F4 7.5/11 18.3/23.1 15/22 7.5/11 9S4/9S4
PI9200-011G4/
PI9200-011F4/
PI9200-015F4
11/11/15 23.1/23.1/29.8 22/22/27 11/11/15 9L1/9L1/9L1
PI9200-015G4/ PI9200-018F4
15/18.5 29.8/35.7 27/34 15/18.5 9L1/9L1
PI9200-018G4/
PI9200-022F4 18.5/22 35.7/41.7 34/40 18.5/22 9L2/9L2
PI9200-022G4/ PI9200-030F4
22/30 41.7/57.4 40/55 22/30 9L2/9L2
PI9200-030G4/
PI9200-037F4 30/37 57.4/66.5 55/65 30/37 9L3/9L3
PI9200-037G4/
PI9200-045F4 37/45 66.5/81.7 65/80 37/45 9L3/9L3
PI9200-045G4/ PI9200-055F4
45/55 81.7/101.9 80/100 45/55 9L4/9L4
PI9400-045G4/
PI9400-055F4 45/55 81.7/101.9 80/100 45/55 9P4/9P4
PI9200-055G4/ PI9200-075F4
55/75 101.9/137.4 100/130 55/75 9L4/9L4
PI9400-055G4/
PI9400-075F4 55/75 101.9/137.4 100/130 55/75 9P4/9P4
PI9200-075G4/ PI9200-093F4
75/93 137.4/151.8 130/147 75/93 9L4/9L4
PI9400-075G4/
PI9400-093F4 75/93 137.4/151.8 130/147 75/93 9P5/9P5
PI9200-093G4/
PI9200-110F4 93/110 151.8/185.3 147/180 93/110 9L5/9L5
PI9400-093G4/ PI9400-110F4
93/110 151.8/185.3 147/180 93/110 9P5/9P5
PI9200-110G4/
PI9200-132F4 110/132 185.3/220.7 180/216 110/132 9L5/9L5
PI9400-110G4/ PI9400-132F4
110/132 185.3/220.7 180/216 110/132 9P6/9P6
PI9200-132G4/
PI9200-160F4 132/160 220.7/264.2 216/259 132/160 9L6/9L6
PI9400-132G4/ PI9400-160F4
132/160 220.7/264.2 216/259 132/160 9P6/9P6
PI9200-160G4/
PI9200-187F4 160/187 264.2/309.4 259/300 160/187 9L6/9L6
PI9400-160G4/
PI9400-187F4 160/187 264.2/309.4 259/300 160/187 9P6/9P6
Chapter 2 Standard specification
9
PI9300-187G4/
PI9300-200F4 187/200 309.4/334.4 300/328 187/200 9C1/9C1
PI9300-187G4/
PI9300-200F4 187/200 309.4/334.4 300/328 187/200 9C2/9C2
PI9300-200G4/
PI9300-220F4 200/220 334.4/363.9 328/358 200/220 9C1/9C1
PI9300-200G4/ PI9300-220F4
200/220 334.4/363.9 328/358 200/220 9C2/9C2
PI9400-187G4/
PI9400-200F4 187/200 309.4/334.4 300/328 187/200 9P7/9P7
PI9400-200G4/ PI9400-220F4
200/220 334.4/363.9 328/358 200/220 9P7/9P7
PI9300-220G4/
PI9300-250F4 220/250 363.9/407.9 358/400 220/250 9C1/9C1
PI9300-220G4/
PI9300-250F4 220/250 363.9/407.9 358/400 220/250 9C2/9C2
PI9400-220G4/
PI9400-250F4 220/250 363.9/407.9 358/400 220/250 9P7/9P7
PI9300-250G4/
PI9300-280F4 250/280 407.9/457.4 400/449 250/280 9C3/9C3
PI9300-280G4/ PI9300-315F4
280/315 457.4/533.2 449/516 280/315 9C3/9C3
PI9300-315G4/
PI9300-355F4 315/355 533.2/623.3 516/570 315/355 9C3/9C3
PI9300-355G4/ PI9300-400F4
355/400 623.3/706.9 570/650 355/400 9C3/9C3
3-phase 690V ±10%
PI9200-055G6/
PI9200-075F6 55/75 70/90 62/85 55/75 9L4/9L4
PI9400-055G6/ PI9400-075F6
55/75 70/90 62/85 55/75 9P4/9P4
PI9200-075G6/
PI9200-093F6 75/93 90/105 85/102 75/93 9L4/9L4
PI9400-075G6/
PI9400-093F6 75/93 90/105 85/102 75/93 9P5/9P5
PI9200-093G6/ PI9200-110F6
93/110 105/130 102/125 93/110 9L5/9L5
PI9400-093G6/
PI9400-110F6 93/110 105/130 102/125 93/110 9P5/9P5
PI9200-110G6/ PI9200-132F6
110/132 130/170 125/150 110/132 9L5/9L5
PI9400-110G6/
PI9400-132F6 110/132 130/170 125/150 110/132 9P6/9P6
PI9200-132G6/ PI9200-160F6
132/160 170/200 150/175 132/160 9L6/9L6
PI9400-132G6/
PI9400-160F6 132/160 170/200 150/175 132/160 9P6/9P6
PI9200-160G6/
PI9200-187F6 160/187 200/210 175/198 160/187 9L6/9L6
PI9400-160G6/ PI9400-187F6
160/187 200/210 175/198 160/187 9P6/9P6
PI9300-187G6/
PI9300-200F6 187/200 210/235 198/215 187/200 9C2/9C2
Chapter 2 Standard specifications
10
PI9300-187G6/
PI9300-200F6 187/200 210/235 198/215 187/200 9C1/9C1
PI9400-187G6/
PI9400-200F6 187/200 210/235 198/215 187/200 9P7/9P7
PI9300-200G6/
PI9300-220F6 200/220 235/247 215/245 200/220 9C2/9C2
PI9300-200G6/ PI9300-220F6
200/220 235/247 215/245 200/220 9C1/9C1
PI9400-200G6/
PI9400-220F6 200/220 235/247 215/245 200/220 9P7/9P7
PI9300-220G6/ PI9300-250F6
220/250 247/265 245/260 220/250 9C2/9C2
PI9300-220G6/
PI9300-250F6 220/250 247/265 245/260 220/250 9C1/9C1
PI9400-220G6/
PI9400-250F6 220/250 247/265 245/260 220/250 9P7/9P7
PI9300-250G6/
PI9300-280F6 250/280 265/305 260/299 250/280 9C3/9C3
PI9300-280G6/
PI9300-315F6 280/315 305/350 299/330 280/315 9C3/9C3
PI9300-315G6/ PI9300-355F6
315/355 350/382 330/374 315/355 9C3/9C3
PI9300-355G6/
PI9300-400F6 355/400 382/435 374/410 355/400 9C3/9C3
PI9300-400G6/ PI9300-450F6
400/450 435/490 410/465 400/450 9C3/9C3
PI9300-450G6/
PI9300-500F6 450/500 490/595 465/550 450/500 9C3/9C3
※Note: PI9100G3 distinguish between A and B two series,A is single IGBT, B is integrated
intelligent power modules, the specification of both parameters are the same.
※Note: PI9200 series is wall-mounted machines, cables from left to right;
※Note: PI9300 series of standing machines, 9C1and 9C2 has the same power range,with the
following differences: ○1 Main power calbe layout is different,9C1 is to power in from upside and output from the
underside,9C2 is to power in from the left side and output from the right side
○2 9C1‟s bottom fix base is removable
○3 Construction and dimension is different
※Note: PI9400 series is wall-mounted machines, cables from up to down;
※Note:PI9130/PI9230/PI9330/PI9430 bold version of the software on behalf of the inverter to
C3.00 and above the keyboard with MCU.
※Note:The technical specifications of PI9130/PI9230/PI9330/PI9430 is same as
PI9100/PI9200/PI9300/PI9400.
2-2.Main circuit terminal screw specification
size Screw
specification
Tightening
torque(Nm) size
Screw
specification
Tightening
torque(Nm) size
Screw
specification
Tightening
torque(
Nm)
9S2 M4 1.2~1.5 9L1 M5 2~2.5 9P4 M10 18~23
9S3 M5 2~2.5 9L2 M6 4~6 9P5 M10 18~23
9S4 M5 2~2.5 9L3 M6 4~6 9P6 M10 18~23
Chapter 2 Standard specification
11
9C1 M12 32~40 9L4 M8 9~11 9P7 M12 32~40
9C2 M12 32~40 9L5 M10 18~23 9P8 M12 32~40
9C3 M12 32~40 9L6 M10 18~23
2-3.Technic standard
Items Specifications
Po
wer
Voltage and frequency
levels
Single-phase 220V, 50/60Hz Three-phase 220V, 50/60Hz
Three-phase 380V, 50/60Hz Three-phase 480V, 50/60Hz Three-phase 690V, 50/60Hz
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage:±10% Frequency:±5%
Voltage unbalance rate is less than 3%; aberration rate meet IEC61800-2 standard
Co
ntr
ol
syst
em
Control system High performance vector control inverter based on DSP
Control method V/F control, vector control W/O PG, vector control W/ PG
Automatic torque boost
function
Realize low frequency (1Hz) and large output torque control
under the V/F control mode.
Acceleration/deceleratio
n control
Straight or S-curve mode. Four times available and time
range is 0.0 to 6500.0s.
V/F curve mode Linear, square root/m-th power, customized definition V/F curve
Over load capability
G type:rated current 150% - 1 minute, rated current 180% - 2
seconds
F type:rated current 120% - 1 minute, rated current 150% - 2 seconds
Maximum frequency Vector control:0 to 300Hz
V/F control:0 to 3200Hz
Carrier Frequency 0.5 to 16kHz; automatically adjust carrier frequency
according to the load characteristics.
Input frequency
resolution
Digital setting: 0.01Hz Analog setting: Minimum simulation
setting :0.01Hz
Start torque G type: 0.5Hz/150% (vector control W/O PG) F type: 0.5Hz/100% (vector control W/O PG)
Speed range 1:100 (vector control W/O PG) 1:1000 (vector control W/
PG)
Steady-speed precision Vector control W/O PG: ≤ ± 0.5% (rated synchronous speed) Vector control W/ PG: ≤ ± 0.02% (rated synchronous speed)
Torque response ≤ 40ms (vector control W/O PG)
Torque boost Automatic torque boost; manual torque boost(0.1% to 30.0%)
DC braking DC braking frequency: 0.0Hz to max. frequency, braking time:
0.0 to 100.0 seconds, braking current value: 0.0% to 100.0%
Jogging control Jog Frequency Range: 0.00Hz to max. frequency; Jog Ac/deceleration time: 0.0s to 6500.0s
Multi-speed operation Achieve up to 16-speed operation through the control
terminal
Built-in PID Easy to realize closed-loop control system for the process control.
Automatic voltage
regulation(AVR)
Automatically maintain a constant output voltage when the
voltage of electricity grid changes
Torque limit and control "Excavator" feature - torque is automatically limited during the operation to prevent frequent overcurrent trip; the closed-
loop vector mode is used to control torque.
Chapter 2 Standard specifications
12
Perso
nali
za
tio
n
fun
cti
on
Self-inspection of
peripherals after power-
on
After powering on, peripheral equipment will perform safety
testing, such as ground, short circuit, etc.
Common DC bus
function Multiple inverters can use a common DC bus.
Quick current limiting
The current limiting algorithm is used to reduce the inverter
overcurrent probability, and improve whole unit anti-
interference capability.
Timing control Timing control function: time setting range(0m to 6500m)
Ru
nn
ing
Inpu
t si
gnal
Running
method Keyboard/terminal/communication
Frequency
setting
10 frequency settings available, including adjustable DC(0 to
10V), adjustable DC(0 to 20mA), panel potentiometer, etc.
Start signal Rotate forward/reverse
Multi-speed At most 16-speed can be set(run by using the multi-function
terminals or program)
Emergency stop
Interrupt controller output
Wobbulate run Process control run
Fault reset When the protection function is active, you can automatically
or manually reset the fault condition.
PID feedback signal
Including DC(0 to 10V), DC(0 to 20mA)
Ou
tput
sign
al
Running status Motor status display, stop, ac/deceleration, constant speed,
program running status.
Fault output Contact capacity :normally closed contact 3A/AC 250V,normally open contact 5A/AC 250V
Analog output
Two-way analog output, 16 signals can be selected such as
frequency, current, voltage and other, output signal range (0
to 10V / 0 to 20mA).
Output signal At most 3-way output, there are 40 signals each way
Run function Limit frequency, jump frequency, frequency compensation, auto-tuning, PID control
DC braking Built-in PID regulates braking current to ensure sufficient
braking torque under no overcurrent condition.
Running command
channel
Three channels: operation panel, control terminals and serial communication port. They can be switched through a variety
of ways.
Frequency source
Total 5 frequency sources: digital, analog voltage, analog
current, multi-speed and serial port. They can be switched through a variety of ways.
Input terminals
6 digital input terminals, compatible with active PNP or NPN
input mode, one of them can be for high-speed pulse input(0 to 100 kHz square wave); 3 analog input terminals AI1and
AI2 of them can be for 0-10V or 0-20mA input,and AI3 can
be for -10V to +10V input.
Output terminals
2 digital output terminals, one of them can be for high-speed
pulse output(0 to 100kHz square wave); one relay output
terminal; 2 analog output terminals respectively for optional range (0 to 20mA or 0 to 10V), they can be used to set
frequency, output frequency, speed and other physical
parameters.
Chapter 2 Standard specification
13
Pro
tecti
on
fu
ncti
on
Inverter protection
Overvoltage protection, undervoltage protection, overcurrent
protection, overload protection, overheat protection,
overcurrent stall protection, overvoltage stall protection,
losting-phase protection (optional), communication error, PID feedback signal abnormalities, PG failure and short circuit to
ground protection.
IGBT temperature
display Displays current temperature IGBT
Inverter controlled fan Can be set
Instantaneous power-down restart
Less than 15 milliseconds: continuous operation.
More than 15 milliseconds: automatic detection of motor
speed,start tracking the motor current speed.
Speed start tracking
method The inverter automatically tracks motor speed after it starts
Parameter protection
function
Protect inverter parameters by setting administrator Password
and decoding
Dis
pla
y
LED/O
LED
display keyboa
rd
Running
information
Monitoring objects including: running frequency, set
frequency, bus voltage, output voltage, output current, output
power, output torque, input terminal status, output terminal status, analog AI1 value, analog AI2 value, motor Actual
running speed,PID set value percentage, PID feedback
value percentage.
Error
message
At most save three error message, and the time, type, voltage,
current, frequency and work status can be queried when the failure is occurred.
LED display Display parameters
OLED display3 Optional, prompts operation content in Chinese/English text.
Copy parameter3 Can upload and download function code information of
frequency converter, rapid replication parameters.
Key lock and function
selection
Lock part or all of keys, define the function scope of some
keys to prevent misuse.
Co
mm
u
ni
ca
tio
n
RS485
The optional completely isolated RS485 communication
module can communicate with the host computer. 9KRSCB.V5/9KRLCB.V5 and above is built in 485 moudle.
En
vir
on
men
t
Environment
temperature -10 ℃ to 40 ℃ (temperature at 40 ℃ to 50 ℃, please
derating for use)
Storage temperature -20 ℃ to 65 ℃
Environment humidity Less than 90% R.H, no condensation.
Vibration Below 5.9m/s² (= 0.6g)
Application sites Indoor where no sunlight or corrosive, explosive gas, dust, flammable gas, oil mist, water vapor, drip or salt, etc.
Altitude Below 1000m
Pollution degree 2
Degree of protection IP20
Pro
du
ct
sta
nd
ard
Product adopts safety standards.
IEC61800-5-1:2007
Product adopts EMC
standards. IEC61800-3:2005
Cooling method Forced air cooling
Note:“Superscript³” means software version is C3.00 and the keyboard just like the above with
MCU can do the functions.
14
第
十
章
Chapter 3 Keyboard
3-1.Keyboard description
JP6E9100 keyboard control panel JPR6E9100 keyboard control panel
Diagram 3-1 Operation panel display
NOTE: The “R” in the “JPR6E9100” means keyboard with MCU.
3-2.Keyboard Indicators
Indicator flag Name
Sta
tus
lam
p
RUN
Running indicator light
* ON: the inverter is working * OFF: the inverter stops
LOCAL/
REMOTE
Command indicator light
That is the indicator for keyboard operation, terminal operation and remote operation (communication control)
* ON: terminal control working status
* OFF: keyboard control working status * Flashing: remote control working status
FWD/REV
Forward/reverse running light
* ON: in forward status
* OFF: in reversal status
TUNE/TC
Motor self-learning / torque control / fault indicator
* ON: in torque control mode
* Slow flashing: in the motor tunning status
* Quick flashing: in the fault status
Un
its
com
bin
ati
on
ind
ica
tor
HzAV
Hz frequency unit
A current unit
V voltage unit
RPM speed unit
% percentage
3-3.Description of operation panel keys
Chapter 3 Keyboard
15
Sign Name Function
Parameter
Setting/Esc Key
* Enter into the modified status of main menu * Esc from functional parameter modification
* Esc submenu or functional menu to status menu
Shift Key
*Choose displayed parameter circularly under running or stop interface; choose parameter‟s modified position when
modify parameter
Increasing Key *Parameter or function number increasing
Multi-function key definition 13
UP key setted by parameter F6.18
Decreasing key *Parameter or function number decreasing
Multi-function key
definition 23 DOWN key setted by parameter F6.19
Running key For starting running in the mode of keyboard control status
Stomp/Reset Key
* For stopping running in the running status; for resetting the operation in fault alarm status. The function of the key
is subject to F6.00
Enter Key
* Enter into levels of menu screen, confirm settings.
Keyboard
potentiometer
* F0.03 is set to 4, keyboard potentiometer is used to set the
running frequency.
Keyboard encoder3
* In query status, function parameter increasing or decreasing
* In modified status, the function parameter or modified
position increasing or decreasing.
* In monitoring status, frequency setting increasing or
decreasing
Note:“Superscript³” means software version is C3.00 and the keyboard just like the above with
MCU can do the functions.
3-4.Keyboard display letters and numbers correspond
2 3 4 51 68 97
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
CA E FH I
SP
I
UC
DisplayLetter
A b C d E F
OnLIHG
P U r S t
DisplayLetter
DisplayLetter
DisplayLetter
DisplayLetter
DisplayLetter
Corres-
pondingLetter
Corres-
pondingLetter
Corres-
pondingLetter
Corres-
pondingLetter
Corres-
pondingLetter
Corres-
pondingLetter
T
3-4-1.Examples of parameter settings Instructions on viewing and modifying function code
PI9000 inverter‟s operation pane is three levels menu for parameter setting etc.Three levels: function parameter group (Level 1)→function code(level 2)→function code setting(level 3). The
operation is as following:
Chapter 3 Keyboard
16
Shutdown parameter display
PRGChangeparameter group
PRG
First-level menu display
ENTERChange function
parameter selectionPRG
ENTERChange function
parameter valuePRG
ENTER
Power-on
Second-level display
Third-level menu display
Diagram 3-2:Display status and operation processes
Description: Back to the level 2 menu from level 3 menu by PRG key or ENTER key in the
level 3 operation status. The differences between the two keys : ENTER will be back to the level 2
menu and save parameter setting before back, and transfer to the next function code automatically;
PRG will be back to the level 2 menu directly, not save parameter setting, then back to current
function code.
Example 1:Change F0.01 from 50.00Hz to 40.00Hz
PressENTER Press▲
Press ▼
PressENTER
PressENTER
Flicker Flicker Flicker
FlickerFlickerFlicker
PressPRG
PressPRG
PressPRG
Example 2:Restore factory settings
Press▲PressENTER
Flicker
FlickerFlickerFlicker
Press▲
PressENTERPress
ENTER
PressPRG
PressPRG
PressPRG
Without twinkling parameter position, the function code can not be modified in the level 3
menu. The reason maybe as following:
1) The function code can not be modified itself, eg: actual detecting parameters, running
Chapter 3 Keyboard
17
record parameters.
2) The function code can not be modified in the running status. It must be modified in the stop
status.
3-4-2.The way to read parameters in various status
In stop or run status, operate shift key“ ”to display a variety of status parameters respectively. Parameter display selection depends on function code F6.01 (run parameter 1), F6.02
(run parameter 2) and F6.03 (stop parameter 3).
In stop status, there are total 16 stop status parameters that can be set to display/not display: set frequency, bus voltage, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage, analog
input AI2 voltage, panel potentiometer/AI3 input voltage, Actual count value, Actual length value,
PLC running step number, Actual speed display, PID settings, high-speed pulse input frequency and reserve, switch and display the selected parameter by pressing key orderly.
In running status,there are 5 running-status parameters:running frequency,setting
frequency,bus voltage,output voltage, output current default display, and other display parameters:
output power, output torque, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage, analog
input AI2 voltage, panel potentiometer/AI3 input voltage, Actual count value, Actual length value,
linear speed, PID settings and PID feedback, etc, their display depends on function code F6.01 and F6.02 switch and display the selected parameter by pressing key orderly.
Inverter powers off and then powers on again, the displayed parameters are the selected
parameters before power-off.
3-4-3.Password settings The inverter has password protection. When y0.01 become not zero, it is the password and
will be work after exit from function code modified status. Press PRG key again, will display”----”.
One must input the correct password to go to regular menu, otherwise, inaccessible.
To cancel the password protection function, firstly enter correct password to access and then set y0.01 to 0.
3-4-4.Motor parameter auto tunning Choose vector control, one must input the motor‟s parameters in the nameplate accurately
before running the inverter. PI9000 series frequency inverter will match the motor‟s standard parameters according to its nameplate. The vector control is highly depend on motor‟s parameters.
The parameters of the controlled motor must be inputted accurately for the good control
performance. Motor parameter auto tunning steps are as follows:
Firstly select command source (F0.11=0) as the comment channel for operation panel, then
input the following parameters according to the nameplate motor parameters (selection is based on the current motor):
Motor Selection Parameters
Motor
b0.00: motor type selection b0.01: motor rated power
b0.02: motor rated voltage b0.03: motor rated current b0.04: motor rated frequency b0.05: motor rated speed
For asynchronous motors
If the motor can NOT completely disengage its load, please select 1 (asynchronous motor
parameter static auto tunning) for b0.27, and then press the RUN key on the keyboard panel. If the motor can completely disengage its load, please select 2 (asynchronous motor parameter
comprehensive auto tunning) for b0.27, and then press the RUN key on the keyboard panel, the
inverter will automatically calculate the motor‟s following parameters:
Motor Selection Parameters
Motor
b0.06:asynchronous motor stator resistance
b0.07:asynchronous motor rotor resistance
b0.08:asynchronous motor leakage inductance b0.09:
asynchronous motor mutUal inductance
b0.10: asynchronous motor no-load current
Complete motor parameter auto tunning.
18
第
十
章
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
4-1.Operating environment
(1) Environmental temperature -10℃ to 50℃ Above 40℃,duration is required,the capacity
will decrease 3% by each 1℃.So it is not advisable to use inverter above 50℃
(2) Prevent electromagnetic interference, and away from interference sources.
(3) Prevent the ingress of droplets, vapor, dust, dirt, lint and metal fine powder.
(4) Prevent the ingress of oil, salt and corrosive gases.
(5) Avoid vibration.
(6) Avoid high temperature and humidity or exposure to rain, humidity shall be less than
90% RH (non-condensing).
(7) Altitude below 1000 meters
(8) Never use in the dangerous environment of flammable, combustible, explosive gas, liquid
or solid.
4-2.Installation direction and space The inverter shall be installed in the room where it is well ventilated, the wall-mounted
installation shall be adopted, and the inverter must keep enough space around adjacent items or
baffle (wall). As shown below figure:
Diagram 4-1:nstallation direction and space
4-3.Wiring diagram
The wiring of inverter is divided into two parts of main circuit and control circuit. User must
correctly connect in accordance with the wiring circuit as shown in the following figure.
or more or more
Air
WARNING Read the operation manUal before adjust or inspect. High voltage inside.Maintained by the well-trained personnel. Confirm the input and output dc control cables are well connected. Adjust or inspect the inner circuits after power down and discharge.
Air out
Air in Air in
or more
150mm or more
Air out 150mm
50mm 50mm
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
19
4-3-1.11kW following wiring diagram
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Diagram 4-1:11kW following wiring diagram
Note: the software version of C3.00 or more (including C3.00) is equipped with
J16 function..
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
20
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Diagram 4-2:11kW below 9KRSCB.V5 and above wiring diagram
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
21
4-3-2.11kW ~ 15kW wiring diagram
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Diagram 4-3:11kW~15kW wiring diagram
Note: software version C3.00 and above to have J16 function.
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
22
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Diagram 4-4: 9KRLCB.V5 11kW~15kW and above wiring diagram
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
23
4-3-3.18.5kW ~ 355kW wiring diagram
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Diagram 4-5:18.5kW ~ 355kW wiring diagram
Note: software version C3.00 and above to have J16 function.
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
24
Main Circuit
Control Circuit
Diagram 4-6:9KRLCB.V5 18.5kW~355kW and above wiring diagram
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
25
4-4.Main circuit terminal (G type) 4-4-1.PI9000 main circuit terminal 1.Main circuit terminal(<15kW, 380V)
Directcurrentreactance
Main power input Main power output Groundterminal
P P+R S T V/T2 W/T3U/T1 ERB
Brakeresistance
Diagram 4-2:Main circuit terminal(<15kW,380V)
2.Main circuit terminal(18.5kW to 160kW, 380V)(Left In, Right Out)
S T
Input end ofpower
Groundterminals
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Output endof power
E-P+P R
P/P+:DC reactor
P+/-:Braking units
Diagram 4-3:Main circuit terminal(18.5kW to 160kW,380V)
3.Main circuit terminal(187kW to 355kW, 380V)(Left In,Right Out)
S T
Input end ofpower
Groundterminals
U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
Output endof power
EP+P R
P/P+:DC reactor
Diagram 4-4:Main circuit terminal(187kW to 355kW,380V) 4.Main circuit terminal(45kW to 220kW, 380V)(Up In, Down Out)
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
26
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
P P+ P- U/T1 V/T2 W/T2 E
P/P+ : DC reactor Output end of mainpower
P-/P+:Braking unit
Input end of main power
Ground
terminals
Diagram 4-5:Main circuit terminal(45kW to 220kW,380V)
Note: P/P+ standard configuration is for the shorted state; if external DC reactor is connected,
firstly disconnect and then reconnect.
4-4-2.Function description of main circuit terminal
Terminals Name Description
R/L1
Inverter input terminals Connect to three-phase power supply, single-phase connects to R, T
S/L2
T/L3
/E Ground terminals Connect to ground
P+, RB Braking resistor terminals Connect to braking resistor
U/T1
Output terminals Connect to three-phase motor V/T2
W/T3
P+, P-(-) DC bus output terminals Connect to braking unit
P, P+ DC reactor terminals
Connect to DC reactor(remove the shorting
block(9300 series DC reactor is standard accessories)
4-5.Control circuit terminals 4-5-1.Arrangement of control circuit terminals
1. 9KLCB board control circuit terminals
TA1 TC1 TB1 COM SPB +24V COM PLC +24V +10V GNDDI8 DI6 DI4 DI2
TA2 TC2 TB2 COM SPA DI7 DI5 DI3 DI1 retain AI2 AI1 DA1 DA2 GND Diagram 4-6:9KLCB board control circuit terminals
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
27
2. 9KSCB board control circuit terminals
TC1 TB1 COM SPA COM PLC +24V +10V GNDDI5 DI3
TA1 COM SPB DI6 DI4 DI2 +24V AI2 AI1 DA2 DA1 GND
DI1
Diagram 4-7:9KSCB board control circuit terminals
3. 9KSCB.V5 and above board control circuit terminals
TA1 TC1 TB1 DI6 485+ 485- DA1 DA2 AI2DI3 DI4 DI5
COM SPB SPA PLC COM DI2DI124V +10V GND AI3AI1
Diagram 4-8:9KSCB.V5 and above board control circuit terminals(<11kW)
4.9KRLCB.V5 and above board control circuit terminals
TA1 TC1 TB1 DI1 DI3 DI5 DI7 DA1 AI3SPA SPB COM
PLC COM DI4DI224V DI6 DI8 AI2DA2TA2 TC2 TB3
AI1 485- 485+
GND GND10V
Diagram 4-9:9KRLCB.V5 and above board control circuit terminals(>11kW)
4-5-2. Description of control circuit terminals
Category Symbol Name Function
Power supply
+10V-GND External+10V
power supply
Output +10V power supply, maximum output
current: 10mA
Generally it is used as power supply of external potentiometer, potentiometer resistance range:
1kΩ to 5kΩ
+24V-COM External+24V
power supply
Output +24V power supply, generally it is used as power supply of digital input and output terminals
and external sensor.
Maximum output current: 200mA
PLC External power
input terminal
When external signal is used to drive, please unplug J5 jumpers , PLC must be connected to
external power supply, and to +24V (default).
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
28
Analog
input
AI1-GND Analog input
terminal 1
1.Input range:(DC 0V to 10V/0 to 20mA), depends
on the selected J3 jumper on control panel.
2.Input impedance: 20kΩ with voltage input,
510Ω with current input.
AI2-GND Analog input
terminal 2
1.Input range:(DC 0V to 10V/0 to 20mA), depends on the selected J4 jumper on control panel.
2.Input impedance: 20kΩ with voltage input,
510Ω with current input.
AI3 Analog input
terminal 3
1.Input range:((DC -10V~+10V), depends on the
selected J5 jumper on control panel.
2,Voltage input impedance: 20K 3, AI3 reference potential can be GND or -10V.
Note:9KRSCB.V5 and above have AI3function.
Digital input
DI1 Digital input 1 1.Opto-coupler isolation, compatible with bipolar input
2.Input impedance: 4.7kΩ 3.Voltage range with level input: 9V to 30V
4. Below 11KW: (DI1 to DI6)drive manner is
controlled by J5, when external power supply is used to drive, please unplug J5 jumpers ,
5. Above 11KW: (DI1 to DI4)drive manner is
controlled by J6, (DI5 to DI8)drive manner is controlled by J5, when external power supply
is used to drive, please unplug J5 jumpers ,
DI2 Digital input 2
DI3 Digital input 3
DI4 Digital input 4
DI5 Digital input 5
DI6 Digital input 6
DI7 Digital input 7
DI8 Digital input 8
DI5 High-speed pulse
input terminals
Except the function of DI1 to DI4,DI6 to DI8,DI5
can also be used as high-speed pulse input channels.Maximum input frequency: 100kHz
Analog
output
DA1-GND Analog output 1
The selected J2 jumper on control panel
determines voltage or current output. Output voltage range: 0V to 10V , output current range:
0mA to 20mA
DA2-GND Analog output 2
The selected J1 jumper on control panel
determines voltage or current output. Output voltage range: 0V to 10V , output current range:
0mA to 20mA
Digital output
SPA-COM Digital output 1 Opto-coupler isolation, bipolar open collector output
Output voltage range: 0V to 24V , output current
range: 0mA to 50mA SPB-COM Digital output 2
SPB-COM High-speed pulse
output
Subject to function code(F2.00)"SPB terminal output mode selection"
As a high-speed pulse output, the highest
frequency up to 100kHz;
Relay
output
T/A1-T/C1 Normally open
terminals Contactor drive capacity: normally closed contact
3A/AC 250V,normally open contact 5A/AC
250V, COSø = 0.4. T/B1-T/C1 Normally closed terminals
Built in 485
485+
485 different
signal positive
terminal
Please adopt twisted-pair cable or shielded cable
for 485 communication interface and negative
terminal, standard 485 communication interface. Braking resistor is needed or not depends on J22
jumps wire or no.
Remark: Above 9KRSCB.V5 built in 485 485-
485 different
signal negative
terminal
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
29
Motor
temper
ature
detection
S2/S2/S1
PT100
temperature
detection line
Using a universal table test of which two test lines are 0,
respectively, received two S2 terminals; the remaining
one received S1 terminal.
9KRSC
B.V5/9K
RLCB.V5 and
below
assistance
interface
J12 485 card
interface 26-pin terminal
J13 PG card interface 12-pin terminal
J17 COM and ground interface
Improve the frequency inverter anti-jamming function
J18 GND and ground
interface
Improve the frequency inverter anti-jamming
function
9KRSC
B.V4/9K
LCB.V4 and
above
assistance
interface
J13 Communication card interface
CAN card 26 needles terminals
J10 PG card interface 12 needles terminal
COM and ground
interface
Improve the frequency inverter anti-jamming
function
J18 COM and ground interface
mprove the frequency converter anti interference.
J17 GND and ground
interface mprove the frequency converter anti interference.
4-6.Wiring Precautions:
Danger
Make sure that the power switch is in the OFF state before wiring operation, or electrical
shock may occur!
Wiring must be performed by a professional trained personnel, or this may cause damage
to the equipment and personal injury!
Must be grounded firmly, otherwise there is a danger of electric shock or fire hazard !
Note
Make sure that the input power is consistent with the rated value of inverter, otherwise which may cause damage to the inverter!
Make sure that the motor matches the inverter, otherwise which may cause damage to the
motor or activate the inverter protection! Do not connect power supply to U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 terminals, otherwise which may cause
damage to the inverter!
Do not directly connect braking resistor to DC bus (P), (P +) terminals, otherwise which may cause a fire!
※ The U, V, W output end of inverter can not install phase advancing capacitor or RC
absorbing device. The inverter input power must be cut off when replacing the motor
※ Do not let metal chips or wire ends into inside the inverter when wiring, otherwise which may
cause malfunction to the inverter.
※ Disconnect motor or switch power-frequency power supply only when the inverter stops
output
※ In order to minimize the effects of electromagnetic interference, it is recommended that a
surge absorption device shall be installed additionally when electromagnetic contactor and
relay is closer from the inverter.
※ External control lines of inverter shall adopt isolation device or shielded wire.
※ In addition to shielding, the wiring of input command signal should also be aligned separately,
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
30
it is best to stay away from the main circuit wiring.
※ If the carrier frequency is less than 3KHz, the maximum distance between the inverter and the
motor should be within 50 meters; if the carrier frequency is greater than 4KHz, the distance
should be reduced appropriately, it is best to lay the wiring inside metal tube.
※ When the inverter is additionally equipped with peripherals (filter, reactor, etc.), firstly
measure its insulation resistance to ground by using 1000 volt megger, so as to ensure the
measured value is no less than 4 megohms.
※ When the inverter need to be started frequently, do not directly turn power off, only the
control terminal or keyboard or RS485 operation command can be used to control the
start/stop operation, in order to avoid damage to the rectifier bridge.
※ To prevent the occurrence of an accident, the ground terminal( )must be earthed
firmly(grounding impedance should be less than 10 ohms), otherwise the leakage current will
occur.
※ The specifications on wires used by the main circuit wiring shall comply with the relevant
provisions of the National Electrical Code.
※ The motor's capacity should be equal to or less than the inverter's capacity.
4-7.Spare Circuit When the inverter occurs the fault or trip, which will cause a larger loss of downtime or other
unexpected faults. In order to avoid this case from happening, please additionally install spare circuit to ensure safety.
Note: the characteristics of spare circuit must be confirmed and tested beforehand, and its
power-frequency shall be in accordance with the phase sequence of the inverter.
Diagram 4-10: Spare Circuit Electrical diagrams
Inverter
Interlocked AC contactor
Three-phase power
Chapter 4 Installation and commissioning
31
4-8.Commissioning
F0.00=?
Correctly set motor and
encoder parametersVector control W/PG
V/F
1
2
Select command source
Select suitable frequencysource
Start motor to run,observe the
phenomenon,if abnormal,please
refer to the troubleshooting
End
Select motor start-up mode
Control
NO
YES
Achieve the required control effect?
0
Vector control W/O PG
Select motor stop mode
Correctly motor parameters
Motor parameter self-learning
Commission-
ing
Select control manner
(setting F0.00)
(Set b0.00-b0.05,b0.28,etc)(Set b0.00-b0.05)
Select appropriate
ac/deceleration time(Set F0.13,F0.14)
Select appropriate
ac/deceleration time(Set F0.13,F0.14)
(Set b0.27)
Motor parameter self-learning
(Set b0.27)(Set F0.11)
(Set F0.03,F0.04,F0.07,etc)
(Set F3.00)
Select appropriate
ac/deceleration time(Set F0.13,F0.14)
(Set F3.07)
Diagram 4-11:Commissioning
● Firstly confirm that AC input power supply voltage shall be within inverter
rated input voltage range before connecting power supply to the inverter.
● Connect power supply to the R, S and T terminals of the inverter.
● Select the appropriate operation control method.
32
第
十
章
Chapter 5 Function parameter
5-1.Menu grouping
Note:
“★”: In running status, can not modify the parameter setting
“●”: The actual testing data, can not be modified
“☆”: In stop and run statuses, both can be changed;
“▲”: “Factory parameter”, no change about it.
“_” means the factory parameter is related to power or model. Please check the details in the
involved parameter introduction. Note:“Superscript ³”means software version is C3.00 and the keyboard just like the above
with MCU can do the functions.
Change limit refers to whether the parameters are adjustable.
y0.01 is used for parameters protection password. Parament menu can be enter into only after inputting the right password in the function parament mode or user change parameter mode. When
the y0.01 setted to 0, the password is canceled.
Parameter menu is not protected by password under user customized parameters mode.
F group is the basic function parameters,E group is to enhance function parameters, b group is a function of motor parameters, d group is the monitoring function parameters.
Code Parameter name Functional Description
d0 Monitoring function group Monitoring frequency, current, etc
F0 Basic function group Frequency setting, control mode, acceleration and deceleration time
F1 Input terminals group Analog and digital input functions
F2 Output terminals group Analog and digital output functions
F3 Start and stop control group Start and stop control parameters
F4 V/F control parameters V/F control parameters
F5 Vector control parameters Vector control parameters
F6 Keyboard and display To set key and display function parameters
F7 Auxiliary function group To set Jog, jump frequency and other auxiliary function parameters
F8 Fault and protection To set fault and protection parameters
F9 Communication parameter group
To set MODBUS communication function
FA Torque control parameters To set parameters under torque control mode
Fb Control optimization parameters
To set parameters of optimizing the control performance
FC Extend parameters group Special application parameters setting
E0 Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting
To set Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting function parameters
E1 Multi-stage command, simple PLC
Multi-speed setting, PLC operation
Chapter 5 Function parameter
33
E2 PID function group To set Built-in PID parameters
E3 Virtual DI, Virtual DO Virtual I/O parameter setting
b0 Motor parameters To set motor parameter
y0 Function code management To set password, parameter initialization and parameter group display
y1 Fault query Fault message query
5-1-1.d0 Group - Monitoring function group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
1. d0.00 Running frequency Frequency converter theory 0.01Hz
2. d0.01 Set frequency Actual set frequency 0.01Hz
3. d0.02 DC bus voltage Detected value for DC bus voltage 0.1V
4. d0.03 Inverter output voltage Actual output voltage 1V
5. d0.04 Inverter output current Effective value for Actual motor current 0.01A
6. d0.05 Motor output power Calculated value for motor output power 0.1kW
7. d0.06 Motor output torque Motor output torque percentage 0.1%
8. d0.07 DI input status DI input status -
9. d0.08 DO output status DO output status -
10. d0.09 AI1 voltage (V) AI1 input voltage value 0.01V
11. d0.10 AI2 voltage (V) AI2 input voltage value 0.01V
12. d0.11 Panel potentiometer
voltage Panel potentiometer /AI3 voltage 0.01V
13. d0.12 Count value Actual pulse count value in counting function -
14. d0.13 Length value Actual length in fixed length function -
15. d0.14 Actual operating speed Motor actual running speed -
16. d0.15 PID setting Reference value percentage when PID runs %
17. d0.16 PID feedback Feedback value percentage when PID runs %
18. d0.17 PLC stage Stage display when PLC runs -
19. d0.18 High-speed pulse input
frequency
High-speed pulse input frequency display,
unit: 0.01Khz 0.01kHz
20. d0.19 Feedback
speed(unit:0.1Hz) Actual output frequency of converter 0.01Hz
21. d0.20 Remaining run time Remaining run time display, it is for timing run control
0.1Min
22. d0.21 Linear speed Linear speed calculated from angular speed 1m/Min
Chapter 5 Function parameter
34
and diameter is used for controlling constant
tension and constant linear speed.
23. d0.22 Current power-on time Total time of current inverter power-on 1Min
24. d0.23 Current run time Total time of current inverter run 0.1Min
25. d0.24 High-speed pulse input frequency
High-speed pulse input frequency display, unit: 1Hz
1Hz
26. d0.25 Communication set value
Frequency, torque or other command values set by communication port
0.01%
27. d0.26 Encoder feedback speed PG feedback speed, to an accuracy of 0.01Hz 0.01Hz
28. d0.27 Master frequency
display
Frequency set by F0.03 master frequency
setting source 0.01Hz
29. d0.28 Auxiliary frequency
display
Frequency set by F0.04 auxiliary frequency
setting source 0.01Hz
30. d0.29 Command torque (%) Observe the set command torque under the
torque control mode 0.1%
31. d0.30 Reserved
32. d0.31 Synchro rotor position Synchro rotor position angle 0.0°
33. d0.32 Resolver position Rotor position when rotary transformer is used
as a speed feedback -
34. d0.33 ABZ position Position information calculated from when
ABZ incremental feedback encoder is adopted 0
35. d0.34 Z signal counter Encoder Z-phase signal count -
36. d0.35 Inverter status Display run, stand by and other statuses -
37. d0.36 Inverter type 1.G type (constant torque load type)
2.F type (fans/pumps load type) -
38. d0.37 AI1 voltage before
correction
Input voltage value before AI1 linear
correction 0.01V
39. d0.38 AI2 voltage before
correction
Input voltage value before AI2 linear
correction 0.01V
40. d0.39 Panel potentiometer
voltage before correction
Panel potentiometer /AI3 voltage before linear
correction 0.01V
41. d0.40 Reserved
42. d0.41 motor temperature inspection function3
PT100 inspect motor temperature value 0°
5-1-2.F0 Group - Basic function group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
43. F0.00 Motor control manner 0.Vector control W/O PG 2 ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
35
1.Vector control W/ PG
2.V/F control
44. F0.01 Keyboard set frequency 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
45. F0.02 Frequency command
resolution
1: 0.1Hz
2: 0.01Hz 2 ★
46. F0.03 Frequency source
master setting 0 to 10 1 ★
47. F0.04 Frequency source
auxiliary setting 0 to 10 0 ★
48. F0.05
Reference object
selection for frequency
source auxiliary setting
0. relative to maximum frequency
1.relative to master frequency source A 0 ☆
49. F0.06 Frequency source
auxiliary setting range 0% to 150% 100% ☆
50. F0.07 Frequency source superimposed selection
Units digit: frequency source selection
Tens digit: arithmetic relationship of master and auxiliary for frequency
source
00 ☆
51. F0.08
Frequency source offset
frequency when
superimposing
0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
52. F0.09
Shutdown memory
selection for digital set frequency
0: W/O memory
1: W/ memory 1 ☆
53. F0.10 Frequency command UP / DOWN reference
when running
0: Running frequency
1: Set frequency 0 ★
54. F0.11 Command source
selection
0.Keyboard control (LED off) 1.Terminal block control (LED on)
2.Communications command control
(LED flashes) 3. Keyboard control+ Communications
command control
4. Keyboard control+ Communications command control+ Terminal block
control
0 ☆
55. F0.12
Binding frequency
source for command source
Units digit: binding frequency source
selection for operation panel command
Tens digit: terminal command binding frequency source selection (0 to 9, same
as units digit)
Hundreds digit: communication command binding frequency source
selection (0 to 9, same as units digit)
000 ☆
56. F0.13 Acceleration time 1 0.00s to 6500s Depends ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
36
on models
57. F0.14 Deceleration time 1 0.00s to 6500s Depends
on models ☆
58. F0.15 Ac/Deceleration time
unit 0:1 second; 1:0.1 second
2:0.01 second 1 ★
59. F0.16 Ac/deceleration time
reference frequency
0: F0.19(maximum frequency)
1: Set frequency 2: 100Hz
0 ★
60. F0.17 Carrier frequency adjustment as per
temperature
0: NO
1: YES 0 ☆
61. F0.18 Carrier Frequency 0.5kHz to 16.0kHz Depends
on models ☆
62. F0.19 Maximum output frequency
50.00Hz to 320.00Hz 50.00Hz ★
63. F0.20 Upper limit frequency
source
0: F0.21 setting 1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Panel potentiometer setting 4: High-speed pulse setting
5: communications reference
6:Analog AI3 setting
0 ★
64. F0.21 Upper limit frequency F0.23 (lower limit frequency) to
F0.19(maximum frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
65. F0.22 Upper limit frequency
offset 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
66. F0.23 Lower limit frequency 0.00Hz to F0.21 (upper limit frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
67. F0.24 Running direction 0:same direction;1: opposite direction 0 ☆
68. F0.25 Reserved
69. F0.26 Reserved 0: 0.01Hz; 1: 0.05Hz;
2: 0.1Hz; 3: 0.5Hz
70. F0.27 GF type 1.G type (constant torque load type)
2.F type (fans/pumps load type) - ●
5-1-3.F1 Gruop - Input terminals group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
71. F1.00 DI1 terminal function selection
0 to 51
1 ★
72. F1.01 DI2 terminal function selection 2 ★
73. F1.02 DI3 terminal function selection 8 ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
37
74. F1.03 DI4 terminal function selection 9 ★
75. F1.04 DI5 terminal function selection 12 ★
76. F1.05 DI6 terminal function selection 13 ★
77. F1.06 DI7 terminal function selection 0 ★
78. F1.07 DI8 terminal function selection 0 ★
79. F1.08 Undefined
80. F1.09 Undefined
81. F1.10 Terminal command mode
0: Two-wire type 1 1: Two-wire type 2
2: Three-wire type 1
3: Three-wire type 2
0 ★
82. F1.11 Terminal UP / DOWN change
rate 0.001Hz/s to 65.535Hz/s 1.00Hz/s ☆
83. F1.12 Minimum input value for AI
curve 1 0.00V to F1.14 0.30V ☆
84. F1.13 Minimum input setting for AI
curve 1 -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
85. F1.14 Maximum input for AI curve 1 F1.12 to +10.00V 10.00V ☆
86. F1.15 Maximum input setting for AI
curve 1 -100.0% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆
87. F1.16 Minimum input value for AI
curve 2 0.00V to F1.18 0.00V ☆
88. F1.17 Minimum input setting for AI curve 2
-100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
89. F1.18 Maximum input for AI curve 2 F1.16 to +10.00V 10.00V ☆
90. F1.19 Maximum input setting for AI curve 2
-100.0% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆
91. F1.20 Minimum input value for AI
curve 3 -10.00V to F1.22 0.00V ☆
92. F1.21 Minimum input setting for AI
curve 3 -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
93. F1.22 Maximum input for AI curve 3 F1.20 to +10.00V 10.00V ☆
94. F1.23 Maximum input setting for AI
curve 3 -100.0% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆
95. F1.24 AI curve selection
Units digit: AI1 curve selection
Tens digit: AI2 curve selection
Hundreds digit: panel potentiometer /AI3 curve
321 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
38
selection
96. F1.25 Setting selection for AI less than
minimum input
Units digit: setting selection for
AI1 less than minimum input Tens digit: setting selection for
AI2 less than minimum input,
ditto Hundreds digit:setting selection
for panel potentiometer/AI3 less
than minimum input(0 to 1,ditto)
000 ☆
97. F1.26 Minimum pulse input frequency 0.00kHz to F1.28 0.00 kHz ☆
98. F1.27 Minimum pulse input frequency
setting -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
99. F1.28 Maximum pulse input frequency F1.26 to 100.00kHz 50.00kHz ☆
100. F1.29 Maximum pulse input frequency setting
-100.0% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆
101.. F1.30 DI filter time 0.000s to 1.000s 0.01s ☆
102. F1.31 AI1 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
103. F1.32 AI2 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
104. F1.33 Filtering time of panel
potentiometer/AI3 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
105. F1.34 Filter time of pulse input 0.00s to 10.00s 0.00s ☆
106. F1.35 DI terminal valid mode selection
1
Units digit: DI1 0: high level active
1: low level active
Tens digit: DI2 Hundreds digit: DI3
Thousands digit: DI4
Ten thousands digit: DI5
00000 ★
107. F1.36 DI terminal valid mode selection 2
Units digit: DI6
0: high level active 1: low level active
Tens digit: DI7
Hundreds digit: DI8
Thousands digit: DI9
Ten thousands digit: DI10
00000 ★
108. F1.37 DI1 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
109. F1.38 DI2 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
110. F1.39 DI3 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
111. F1.40 Define the input terminal repeat 0:unrepeatable;1:repeatable 0 ★
112. F1.41 Keyboard potentiometer X13 0~100.00% 0.00% ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
39
113. F1.42 Keyboard potentiometer X23 0~100.00% 100.00% ☆
114. F1.43 Keyboard potentiometer set
value3 0~100.00% - ☆
115. F1.44 Keyboard potentiometer X1
corresponding value Y13 -100.00%~+100.00% 0.00% ☆
116. F1.45 Keyboard potentiometer X2
corresponding value Y23 -100.00%~+100.00% 100.00% ☆
117. F1.46 Keyboard potentiometer
control3
Bits:
0: Power down protection 1: Power down zero clear
Ten bits:
0: Stop keep
1: Stop order zero clear
2: Stop over zero clear
Hundred bits: reserved Thousand bits: reserve
00 ☆
5-1-4.F2 Group - Output terminals group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
118. F2.00 SPB terminal output mode selection 0 to 1 0 ☆
119. F2.01 Switching quantity output function
selection
0 to 40
0 ☆
120. F2.02 Relay 1 output function selection
(TA1.TB1.TC1) 2 ☆
121. F2.03 Undefined
122. F2.04
SPA output function selection
(collector open circuit output
terminals)
1 ☆
123. F2.05 Relay 2 output function selection
(TA2.TB2.TC2) 1 ☆
124. F2.06 High-speed pulse output function
selection
0 to 17
0 ☆
125. F2.07 DA1 output function selection 2 ☆
126. F2.08 DA2 output function selection 13 ☆
127. F2.09 Maximum output frequency of high-
speed pulse 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz
50.00
kHz ☆
128. F2.10 SPB switching quantity output delay
time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
129. F2.11 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
130. F2.12 Expansion card DO output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
40
131. F2.13 SPA output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
132. F2.14 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
133. F2.15 DO output terminal active status selection
Units digit: SPB switching
quantity
0: positive logic 1: anti-logic
Tens digit: Relay 1
Hundreds digit: Hundreds digit: Undefined
Thousands digit: SPA
Ten thousands digit: Relay 2
00000 ☆
134. F2.16 DA1 zero bias coefficient -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
135. F2.17 DA1 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1.00 ☆
136. F2.18 DA2 zero bias coefficient -100.0% to +100.0% 20.0% ☆
137. F2.19 DA2 gain -10.00 to +10.00 0.80 ☆
5-1-5.F3 Group - Start and stop control group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
138. F3.00 Start-up mode
0: Direct startup
1: Speed tracking restart 2: Pre-excitation start (AC asynchronous
motor)
0 ☆
139. F3.01 Speed tracking mode
0: start from stop frequency
1: start from zero speed
2: start from maximum frequency 3: Rotate speed tracking method3
- ★
140. F3.02 Speed tracking value 1 to 100 20 ☆
141. F3.03 Start frequency 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
142. F3.04 Hold time for start
frequency 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★
143. F3.05 Start DC braking
current 0% to 100% 0% ★
144. F3.06 Start DC braking time 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★
145. F3.07 Stop mode 0: Deceleration parking 1: Free stop
0 ☆
146. F3.08 Initial frequency of stop DC braking
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
147. F3.09 Waiting time of stop DC braking
0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
41
148. F3.10 Stop DC braking
current 0% to 100% 0% ☆
149. F3.11 Stop DC braking time 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆
150. F3.12 Braking utilization rate 0% to 100% 100% ☆
151. F3.13 Ac/deceleration mode
0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
1: S curve acceleration and deceleration A 2: S curve acceleration and deceleration B
0 ★
152. F3.14 Proportion of S curve
start-section 0.0% to (100.0% to F3.15) 30.0% ★
153. F3.15 Proportion of S curve
end-section 0.0% to (100.0% to F3.14) 30.0% ★
5-1-6.F4 Group - V/F control parameters
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
154. F4.00 V/F curve setting 0 to11 0 ★
155. F4.01 Torque boost 0.0%(Automatic torque boost)
0.1 to 30% 0.0% ★
156. F4.02 Torque boost cut-off frequency 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum
frequency) 15.00Hz ★
157. F4.03 Multipoint V/F frequency point 1 0.00Hz to F4.05 0.00Hz ★
158. F4.04 Multipoint V/F voltage point 1 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
159. F4.05 Multipoint V/F frequency point 2 F4.03 to F4.07 0.00Hz ★
160. F4.06 Multipoint V/F voltage point 2 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
161. F4.07 Multipoint V/F frequency point 3 F4.05 to b0.04 (rated motor
frequency) 0.00Hz ★
162. F4.08 Multipoint V/F voltage point 3 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
163. F4.09 Slip compensation coefficient 0% to 200.0% 0.0% ☆
164. F4.10 Overexcitation gain 0 to 200 64 ☆
165. F4.11 Oscillation suppression gain 0 to 100 0 ☆
166. F4.12 V/F separation voltage source 0 to 9 0 ☆
167. F4.13 V/F separation voltage digital
setting 0V to rated motor voltage 0V ☆
168. F4.14 V/F separation voltage rise time 0.0s to 1000.0s 0.0s ☆
5-1-7.F5 Group - Vector control parameters
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory Cha
Chapter 5 Function parameter
42
setting nge
169. F5.00 Speed loop low P 1 to 100 30 ☆
170. F5.01 Speed loop low integral time 0.01s to 10.00s 0.50s ☆
171. F5.02 Speed loop low switching frequency 0.00 to F5.05 5.00Hz ☆
172. F5.03 Speed loop high P 0 to 100 20 ☆
173. F5.04 Speed loop high integral time 0.01s to 10.00s 1.00s ☆
174. F5.05 Speed loop high switching frequency F5.02 to
F0.19(max.frequency) 10.00Hz ☆
175. F5.06 Speed loop integral attribute 0:valid;1:invalid 0 ☆
176. F5.07 Torque limit source under speed control
mode options 0-7 0 ☆
177. F5.08 Upper limit digital setting for lower
torque under speed control mode 0.0% to 200.0% 150.0% ☆
178. F5.09 Vector control differential gain 50% to 200% 150% ☆
179. F5.10 Speed loop filter time constant 0.000s to 0.100s 0.000s ☆
180. F5.11 Vector control overexcitation gain 0 to 200 64 ☆
181. F5.12 Excitation regulator proportional gain 0 to 60000 2000 ☆
182. F5.13 Excitation regulator integral gain 0 to 60000 1300 ☆
183. F5.14 Torque regulator proportional gain 0 to 60000 2000 ☆
184. F5.15 Torque regulator integral gain 0 to 60000 1300 ☆
5-1-8.F6 Group - Keyboard and display
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
185. F6.00 STOP/RESET key functions
0: STOP/RESET key is enabled
only under keyboard operation mode
1: STOP/RESET key is enabled
under any operation mode
1 ☆
186. F6.01 Running status display
parameters 1 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 001F ☆
187. F6.02 Running status display
parameters 2 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0000 ☆
188. F6.03 Stop status display parameters 0x0001 to 0xFFFF 0033 ☆
189. F6.04 Load speed display coefficient 0.0001 to 6.5000 3.0000 ☆
190. F6.05 Decimal places for load speed 0:0 decimal places 1 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
43
display 1:1 decimal places
2:2 decimal places
3:3 decimal places
191. F6.06 Inverter module radiator
temperature 0.0℃ to 100.0℃ - ●
192. F6.07 Total run time 0h to 65535h - ●
193. F6.08 Total power-on time 0h to 65535h - ●
194. F6.09 Total power consumption 0 to 65535 kwh - ●
195. F6.10 Software version number of control board
- ●
196. F6.11 Software version number - ●
197. F6.12 to
F6.14 Reserved
198. F6.15 Keyboard type selection 0:keypad (single row LED) 1:big keyboard (double row
LED)
0 ●
199. F6.16 Monitor selection 2
1Kbit/100bit 10bit/1bit
d0.04 ☆ parameter number
parameter series number
200. F6.17 Power correction coefficient 0.00~10.00 1.00 ☆
201. F6.18 Multifunction key definition 13 0 to 7 0 ☆
202. F6.19 Multifunction key definition 23 0 to 7 0 ☆
5-1-9.F7 Group - Auxiliary function group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
203. F7.00 Jog running frequency 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency)
6.00Hz ☆
204. F7.01 Jog acceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 5.0s ☆
205. F7.02 Jog deceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 5.0s ☆
206. F7.03 Jog priority 0:Invalid;1: Valid 1 ☆
207. F7.04 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
208. F7.05 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
209. F7.06 Jump frequency range 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
44
210. F7.07 Jump frequency availability
during ac/deceleration process
0: Invalid
1: Valid 0 ☆
211. F7.08 Acceleration time 2 0.0s to 6500.0s Depends
on models ☆
212. F7.09 Deceleration time 2 0.0s to 6500.0s Depends
on models ☆
213. F7.10 Acceleration time 3 0.0s to 6500.0s Depends
on models ☆
214. F7.11 Deceleration time 3 0.0s to 6500.0s Depends
on models ☆
215. F7.12 Acceleration time 4 0.0s to 6500.0s Depends
on models ☆
216. F7.13 Deceleration time 4 0.0s to 6500.0s Depends
on models ☆
217. F7.14
Switching frequency point
between acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency)
0.00Hz ☆
218. F7.15
Switching frequency point
between deceleration time 1 and deceleration time 2
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
219. F7.16 Forward/reverse rotation deadband
0.00s to 3600.0s 0.00s ☆
220. F7.17 Reverse rotation control 0: Enable;1: Disable 0 ☆
221. F7.18 Set frequency lower than lower limit frequency mode
0: running at lower limit
frequency 1: stop
2: zero speed running
0 ☆
222. F7.19 Droop control 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
223. F7.20 Setting cumulative power-on arrival time
0h to 36000h 0h ☆
224. F7.21 Setting cumulative running arrival time
0h to 36000h 0h ☆
225. F7.22 Start protection selection 0: OFF;1: ON 0 ☆
226. F7.23 Frequency detection value
(FDT1)
0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum
frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
227. F7.24 Frequency detection hysteresis
value (FDT1) 0.0% to 100.0% (FDT1 level) 5.0% ☆
228. F7.25 Frequency reaches detection
width
0.00 to 100% (maximum
frequency) 0.0% ☆
229. F7.26 Frequency detection value 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum 50.00Hz ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
45
(FDT2) frequency)
230. F7.27 Frequency detection hysteresis
value (FDT2)
0.0% to 100.0% (FDT2 level) 5.0% ☆
231. F7.28 Random arrivals frequency
detection value 1
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
232. F7.29 Random arrivals frequency
detection width 1
0.00% to 100.0% (maximum
frequency) 0.0% ☆
233. F7.30 Random arrivals frequency
detection value 2
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
234. F7.31 Random arrivals frequency
detection width 2
0.00% to 100.0% (maximum
frequency) 0.0% ☆
235. F7.32 Zero current detection level 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor
current) 5.0% ☆
236. F7.33 Zero current detection delay time
0.01s to 360.00s 0.10s ☆
237. F7.34 Overrun value of output
current
0.0% (not detected) 0.1% to 300.0% (rated motor
current)
200.0% ☆
238. F7.35 Output current overrun
detection delay time 0.00s to 360.00s 0.00s ☆
239. F7.36 Random arrivals current 1 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor
current) 100% ☆
240. F7.37 Random arrivals current 1
width
0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor
current) 0.0% ☆
241. F7.38 Random arrivals current 2 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current)
100% ☆
242. F7.39 Random arrivals current 2 width
0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current)
0.0% ☆
243. F7.40 Module temperature arrival 0℃ to 100℃ 75℃ ☆
244. F7.41 Cooling fan control
0: Fan running only when
running 1: Fan always running
0 ☆
245. F7.42 Timing function selection 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0 ★
246. F7.43 Timing run time selection
0: F7.44 setting 1: AI1
2: AI2
3: Panel potentiometer Analog input range
corresponds to F7.44
0 ★
247. F7.44 Timing run time 0.0Min to 6500.0Min 0.0Min ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
46
248. F7.45 Current running reaches the set
time. 0.0Min to 6500.0Min 0.0Min ★
249. F7.46 Awakens frequency dormancy frequency(F7.48)to maximum frequency (F0.19)
0.00Hz ☆
250. F7.47 Awakens delay time 0.0s to 6500.0s 0.0s ☆
251. F7.48 Dormancy frequency 0.00Hz to awakens
frequency(F7.46) 0.00Hz ☆
252. F7.49 Dormancy delay time 0.0s to 6500.0s 0.0s ☆
253. F7.50 AI1 input voltage protection
lower limit 0.00V to F7.51 3.1V ☆
254. F7.51 AI1 input voltage protection
upper limit F7.50 to 10.00V 6.8V ☆
255. F7.52 to
F7.53 Reserved
256. F7.54 Jog mode setting 3
Bits: 0: forward
1: reverse 2: determine the direction
from the main termina
Ten bits: 0: restore to the previous state
after jogging
1: stop running after jogging
Hundred bits:
0:recover to the previous
deceleration time after jogging
1: keep the deceleration time
the same after jogging
002 ☆
5-1-10.F8 Group - Fault and protection
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
257. F8.00 Overcurrent stall gain 0 to 100 20 ☆
258. F8.01 Overcurrent stall protection current
100% to 200% - ☆
259. F8.02 Motor overload protection selection
0: Disable;1: Enable 1 ☆
260. F8.03 Motor overload protection gain
0.20 to 10.00 1.00 ☆
261. F8.04 Motor overload pre-alarm coefficient
50% to 100% 80% ☆
262. F8.05 Overvoltage stall gain 0 to 100 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
47
263. F8.06
Overvoltage stall
protection voltage /
energy consumption
brake voltage
120% to 150% 130% ☆
264. F8.07 Input phase loss
protection selection
Units digit:Input phase loss protection
selection
0: Disable;1: Enable
Tens digit:contactor actuation protection
0: Disable;1: Enable
11 ☆
265. F8.08 Output phase loss protection selection
0: Disable;1: Enable 1 ☆
266. F8.09 Short to ground
protection 0:Invalid;1: Valid 1 ☆
267. F8.10 Number of automatic
fault reset 0 to 32767 0 ☆
268. F8.11
Fault DO action
selection during automatic fault reset
0: OFF;1: ON 0 ☆
269. F8.12 Automatic fault reset interval
0.1s to 100.0s 1.0s ☆
270. F8.13 Overspeed detection value
0.0 to 50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0% ☆
271. F8.14 Overspeed detection
time 0.0 to 60.0s 1.0s ☆
272. F8.15 Detection value for too
large speed deviation 0.0 to 50.0% (maximum frequency) 20.0% ☆
273. F8.16 Detection time for too
large speed deviation 0.0 to 60.0s 5.0s ☆
274. F8.17 Fault protection action
selection 1
Units digit: Motor overload (Err.11)
0: Free stop 1: Stop at the selected mode
2: Continue to run
Tens digit: input phase loss (Err.12) (same as units digit)
Hundred digit: output phase loss (Err.13)
(same as units digit) Thousand digit: external fault (Err.15)
(same as units digit)
Ten thousands digit: Communication abnormal( Err.16)(same as units digit)
00000 ☆
275. F8.18 Fault protection action selection 2
Units digit: encoder/PG card abnormal (Err.20)
0: Free stop
1:Switch to V/F and then stop at the
selected mode
00000 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
48
2:Switch to V/F and continue to run
Tens digit: function code read and write
abnormal (Err.21) 0: Free stop
1: Stop at the selected mode
Hundreds digit: Reserved Thousands digit: Motor overheating
(Err.25) ( same as F8.17 units digit)
Ten thousands digit: Running time arrival(Err.26)( same as F8.17 units
digit)
276. F8.19 Fault protection action
selection 3
Units digit:User-defined fault 1(Err.27)
( same as F8.17 units digit)
Tens digit: User-defined fault 2(Err.28)
( same as F8.17 units digit)
Hundreds digit: Power-on time arrival
(Err.29) ( same as F8.17 units digit) Thousands digit: Load drop (Err.30)
0: Free stop
1: Deceleration parking 2: Deceleration up to 7% of the rated
motor frequency, and then continue
running, automatically restore to the set frequency
for when the load drop does not happen.
Ten thousands digit: PID feedback loss when running (Err.31) ( same as F8.17
units digit)
00000 ☆
277. F8.20 Fault protection action
selection 4
Units digit: Too large speed deviation
(Err.42) ( same as F8.17 units digit)
Tens digit: Motor overspeed (Err.43) Hundreds digit: Initial position error
(Err.51)
( same as F8.17 units digit) Thousands digit: Reserved Ten thousands digit:
Reserved
00000 ☆
278. F8.21 Reserved
279. F8.22 Reserved
280. F8.23 Reserved
281. F8.24
Continue running
frequency selection
when failure happens
0: running at current frequency 1: running at set frequency
2: running at upper limit frequency
3: running at lower limit frequency 4: running at abnormal spare frequency
0 ☆
282. F8.25 Abnormal spare frequency
60.0% to 100.0% 100% ☆
283. F8.26 Momentary power cut
action selection
0: Invalid
1: Deceleration 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
49
2: Deceleration and stop
284. F8.27
Recovery judgment
voltage of momentary power cut
50.0% to 100.0% 90% ☆
285. F8.28 Recovery voltage judgment time of
momentary power cut
0.00s to 100.00s 0.50s ☆
286. F8.29 Judgment voltage of momentary power cut
action
50.0% to 100.0% (standard bus
voltage) 80% ☆
287. F8.30 Load drop protection
selection
0: Invalid
1: Valid 0 ☆
288. F8.31 Load drop detection
level 0.0% to 100.0% 10% ☆
289. F8.32 Load drop detection
time 0.0 to 60.0s 1.0s ☆
290. F8.33 The motor temperature
sensor type3 0: Invalid;1:PT100 detect 0 ☆
291. F8.34 Motor overheating protection threshold3
0~200 110 ☆
292. F8.35 Motor overheating forecasting warning
threshold3 0~200 90 ☆
5-1-11.F9 Group - Communication parameter
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chang
e
293. F9.00 Baud rate
Units digit:MODBUS
Tens digit:Profibus-DP
Hundreds digit:Reserved Thousands digit:CAN bus baudrate
6005 ☆
294. F9.01 Data format
0: no parity (8-N-2)
1: even parity (8-E-1) 2: odd parity (8-O-1)
3: no parity (8-N-1)
0 ☆
295. F9.02 This unit address 1-250, 0 for broadcast address 1 ☆
296. F9.03 Response delay 0ms-20ms 2ms ☆
297. F9.04 Reserved
298. F9.05 Data protocol selection
Units digit: MODBUS
0: non-standard MODBUS protocol 1: standard MODBUS protocol
Tens digit: Profibus-DP
0: PP01 format
31 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
50
1: PP02 format
2: PP03 format
3: PP05 format
299. F9.06 Current resolution 0: 0.01A;1: 0.1A 0 ☆
300. F9.07 Communication card type
0:Modbus communication card 1:Profibus communication card
2:Reserved
3:CAN bus communication card
0 ☆
5-1-12.FA Group - Torque control parameters
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
301. FA.00 Speed/torque control
mode selection
0: speed control
1: torque control 0 ★
302. FA.01
Torque setting source
selection under torque
control mode
0: keyboard setting (FA.02)
1: Analog AI1 setting
2: Analog AI2 setting 3: Panel potentiometer setting
4: High-speed pulse setting
5: Communications reference 6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2) 8: Analog AI3 setting
0 ★
303. FA.02 Torque figures set under
torque control mode -200.0% to 200.0% 150% ☆
304. FA.03 Torque control
acceleration time 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆
305. FA.04 Torque control
deceleration time 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆
306. FA.05 Torque control forward
maximum frequency 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency)
50.00
Hz ☆
307. FA.06
Torque control
backward maximum
frequency
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) 50.00
Hz ☆
308. FA.07 Torque filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.00s ☆
5-1-13.Fb Group - Control optimization parameters
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
309. Fb.00 Fast current limiting
manner
0: disable
1: enable 1 ☆
310. Fb.01 Undervoltage point setting 50.0% to 140.0% 100.0
% ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
51
311. Fb.02 Overvoltage point setting 200.0V to 2500.0V - ★
312. Fb.03 Deadband compensation
mode selection
0: no compensation
1: compensation mode 1 2: compensation mode 2
1 ☆
313. Fb.04 Current detection compensation
0 to 100 5 ☆
314. Fb.05 Vector optimization without PG mode
selection
0: no optimization 1: optimization mode 1
2: optimization mode 2
1 ★
315. Fb.06 Upper limiting frequency
for DPWM switching 0.00Hz to 15.00Hz
12.00
Hz ☆
316. Fb.07 PWM modulation manner 0: asynchronous
1: synchronou 0 ☆
317. Fb.08 Random PWM depth 0: Invalid 1 to 10: PWM carrier frequency
random depth
0 ☆
318. Fb.09 Deadband time
adjustment 100% to 200% 150% ☆
5-1-14.FC Group - Extended parameter group
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
319. FC.00 Undefined
320. FC.01 Proportional linkage coefficient 0.00 to 10.00 0 ☆
321. FC.02 PID start deviation 0.0 to 100.0 0 ☆
5-1-15.E0 Group - Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
322. E0.00 Swing setting manner 0: relative to center frequency
1: relative to maximum frequency 0 ☆
323. E0.01 Wobbulate range 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
324. E0.02 Sudden jump frequency range
0.0% to 50.0% 0.0% ☆
325. E0.03 Wobbulate cycle 0.1s to 3000.0s 10.0s ☆
326. E0.04 Triangle wave rise time coefficient
0.1% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆
327. E0.05 Set length 0m to 65535m 1000m ☆
328. E0.06 Actual length 0m to 65535m 0m ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
52
329. E0.07 Pulse per meter 0.1 to 6553.5 100.0 ☆
330. E0.08 Set count value 1 to 65535 1000 ☆
331. E0.09 Specified count value 1 to 65535 1000 ☆
332. E0.10 Reduction frequency
pulse number 0:invalid;1~65535 0 ☆
333. E0.11 Reduction frequency 0.00Hz~F0.19(max frequency) 5.00Hz ☆
5-1-16.E1 Group - Multi-stage command, simple PLC
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
334. E1.00 0-stage speed setting 0X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
335. E1.01 1-stage speed setting 1X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
336. E1.02 2-stage speed setting 2X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
337. E1.03 3-stage speed setting 3X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
338. E1.04 4-stage speed setting 4X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
339. E1.05 5-stage speed setting 5X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
340. E1.06 6-stage speed setting 6X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
341. E1.07 7-stage speed setting 7X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
342. E1.08 8-stage speed setting 8X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
343. E1.09 9-stage speed setting 9X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
344. E1.10 10-stage speed setting 10X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
345. E1.11 11-stage speed setting 11X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
346. E1.12 12-stage speed setting 12X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
347. E1.13 13-stage speed setting 13X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
348. E1.14 14-stage speed setting 14X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
349. E1.15 15-stage speed setting 15X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
350. E1.16 Simple PLC running mode
0: stop after single running
1: hold final value after single running
2: circulating
0 ☆
351. E1.17 Simple PLC power-down
memory selection
Units digit: power-down
memory selection
0: power-down without memory 1: power-down with memory
Tens digit: stop memory
11 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
53
selection
0: stop without memory
1: stop with memory
352. E1.18 0 stage running time T0 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
353. E1.19 0 stage ac/deceleration time selection
0 to 3 0 ☆
354. E1.20 1 stage running time T1 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
355. E1.21 1 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
356. E1.22 2 stage running time T2 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
357. E1.23 2 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
358. E1.24 3 stage running time T3 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
359. E1.25 3 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
360. E1.26 4 stage running time T4 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
361. E1.27 4 stage ac/deceleration time selection
0 to 3 0 ☆
362. E1.28 5 stage running time T5 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
363. E1.29 5 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
364. E1.30 6 stage running time T6 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
365. E1.31 6 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
366. E1.32 7 stage running time T7 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
367. E1.33 7 stage ac/deceleration time selection
0 to 3 0 ☆
368. E1.34 8 stage running time T8 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
369. E1.35 8 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
370. E1.36 9 stage running time T9 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
371. E1.37 9 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
372. E1.38 10 stage running time
T10 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
373. E1.39 10 stage ac/deceleration
time selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
54
374. E1.40 11 stage running time T11 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
375. E1.41 11 stage ac/deceleration
time selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
376. E1.42 12 stage running time T12 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
377. E1.43 12 stage ac/deceleration
time selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
378. E1.44 13 stage running time T13 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
379. E1.45 13 stage ac/deceleration
time selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
380. E1.46 14 stage running time T14 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
381. E1.47 14 stage ac/deceleration time selection
0 to 3 0 ☆
382. E1.48 15 stage running time T15 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
383. E1.49 15 stage ac/deceleration
time selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
384. E1.50 Simple PLC run-time unit 0: S (seconds);1: H (hours) 0 ☆
385. E1.51 Multi-stage command 0
setting mode
0: Function code E1.00 reference
1: Analog AI1 reference
2: Analog AI2 reference 3: Panel potentiometer setting
4: High-speed pulse setting
5: PID control setting 6: Keyboard set frequency
(F0.01) setting, UP/DOWN can
be modified 7: Analog AI3 reference
0 ☆
5-1-17.E2 Group - PID function
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Cha
nge
386. E2.00 PID setting source
0: E2.01 setting 1: Analog AI1 reference
2: Analog AI2 reference
3: Panel potentiometer setting 4: High-speed pulse setting
5: Communications reference
6: Multi-stage command reference 7: Analog AI3 reference
0 ☆
387. E2.01 PID keyboard setting 0.0% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆
388. E2.02 PID feedback source 0 to 9 0 ☆
389. E2.03 PID action direction 0: positive;1: negative 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
55
390. E2.04 PID setting feedback
range 0 to 65535 1000 ☆
391. E2.05 PID inversion cutoff frequency
0.00 to F0.19(maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
392. E2.06 PID deviation limit 0.0% to 100.0% 0% ☆
393. E2.07 PID differential limiting 0.00% to 100.00% 0.10% ☆
394. E2.08 PID reference change
time 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆
395. E2.09 PID feedback filter time 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆
396. E2.10 PID output filter time 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆
397. E2.11 PID feedback loss detection value
0.0%: not judged feedback loss 0.1% to 100.0%
0.0% ☆
398. E2.12 PID feedback loss detection time
0.0s to 20.0s 0.0s ☆
399. E2.13 Proportional gain KP1 0.0 to 200.0 80.0 ☆
400. E2.14 Integration time Ti1 0.01s to 10.00s 0.50s ☆
401. E2.15 Differential time Td1 0.00s to 10.000s 0.000s ☆
402. E2.16 Proportional gain KP2 0.0 to 200.0 20.0 ☆
403. E2.17 Integration time Ti2 0.01s to 10.00s 2.00s ☆
404. E2.18 Differential time Td2 0.00 to 10.000 0.000s ☆
405. E2.19 PID parameter switching conditions
0: no switching
1: switching via terminals 2: automatically switching according
to deviation.
0 ☆
406. E2.20 PID parameter switching deviation 1
0.0% to E2.21 20.0% ☆
407. E2.21 PID parameter switching deviation 2
E2.20 to 100.0% 80.0% ☆
408. E2.22 PID integral properties
Units digit: integral separation 0: Invalid
1: Valid
Tens digit: whether stop integration when output reaches limit
0: continue
1: stop
00 ☆
409. E2.23 PID initial value 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
410. E2.24 PID initial value hold
time 0.00s to 360.00s 0.00s ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
56
411. E2.25 Maximum deviation of
twice outputs(forward) 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆
412. E2.26 Maximum deviation of twice outputs(backward)
0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆
413. E2.27 Computing status after PID stop
0: stop without computing 1: stop with computing
1 ☆
414. E2.28 Reserve
415. E2.29 PID reduce frequency
automatically choice 0: valiad;1: invalid 1 ☆
416. E2.30 PID stop frequency 0.00hz~maximum frequency 25 ☆
417. E2.31 PID monitor time 0s~3600s 10 ☆
418. E2.32 PID monitor times 10~500 20 ☆
5-1-18.E3 Group – Virtual DI、Virtual DO
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
419. E3.00 Virtual VDI1 terminal function selection
0 to 50 0 ★
420. E3.01 Virtual VDI2 terminal function selection
0 to 50 0 ★
421. E3.02 Virtual VDI3 terminal function selection
0 to 50 0 ★
422. E3.03 Virtual VDI4 terminal function selection
0 to 50 0 ★
423. E3.04 Virtual VDI5 terminal
function selection 0 to 50 0 ★
424. E3.05 Virtual VDI terminal status
set
Units digit:Virtual VDI1
Tens digit:Virtual VDI2 Hundreds digit:Virtual VDI3
Thousands digit:Virtual VDI4
Tens of thousands:Virtual VDI5
00000 ★
425. E3.06 Virtual VDI terminal
effective status set mode
Units digit:Virtual VDI1
Tens digit:Virtual VDI2 Hundreds digit:Virtual VDI3
Thousands digit:Virtual VDI4
Tens of thousands:Virtual VDI5
11111 ★
426. E3.07 AI1 terminal as a function
selection of DI 0 to 50 0 ★
427. E3.08 AI2 terminal as a function
selection of DI 0 to 50 0 ★
428. E3.09 Panel potentiometer as a 0 to 50 0 ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
57
function selection of DI
429. E3.10 AI as DI effective mode selection
Units digit:AI1
0:High level effectively 1:Low level effectively
Tens digit:AI2(0 to 1,same as
units digit) Hundreds digit: AI3(0 to 1,same
as units digit)
000 ★
430. E3.11 Virtual VDO1 output
function selection 0 to 40 0 ☆
431. E3.12 Virtual VDO2 output
function selection 0 to 40 0 ☆
432. E3.13 Virtual VDO3 output
function selection 0 to 40 0 ☆
433. E3.14 Virtual VDO4 output
function selection 0 to 40 0 ☆
434. E3.15 Virtual VDO5 output function selection
0 to 40 0 ☆
435. E3.16 VDO output terminal
effective status selection
Units digit:VDO1 0:Positive logic
1:Negative logic
Tens digit: VDO2(0 to 1,same as above)
Hundreds digit:VDO3(0 to
1,same as above) Thousands digit:VDO4(0 to
1,same as above)
Tens of thousands digit:VDO5(0 to 1,same as above)
00000 ☆
436. E3.17 VDO1 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
437. E3.18 VDO2 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
438. E3.19 VDO3 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
439. E3.20 VDO4 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
440. E3.21 VDO5 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
5-1-19.b0 Group - Motor parameters
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
441. b0.00 Motor type selection
0: general asynchronous motor 1: asynchronous inverter motor
2: permanent magnet synchronous
motor
0 ★
442. b0.01 Rated power 0.1kW to 1000.0kW Depends ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
58
on models
443. b0.02 Rated voltage 1V to 2000V Depends
on models ★
444. b0.03 Rated current 0.01A to 655.35A (inverter power ≦
55kW) 0.1A to 6553.5A (inverter rate> 55kW)
Depends
on models ★
445. b0.04 Rated frequency 0.01Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) Depends
on models ★
446. b0.05 Rated speed 1rpm to 36000rpm Depends
on models ★
447. b0.06
Asynchronous
motor stator resistance
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω (inverter power>
55kW)
Motor
parameters ★
448. b0.07
Asynchronous motor rotor
resistance
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω (inverter power> 55kW)
Motor
parameters ★
449. b0.08
Asynchronous
motor leakage inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power <= 55kW)
0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter
power> 55kW)
Motor
parameters ★
450. b0.09
Asynchronous
motor mutUal
inductance
0.1mH to 6553.5mH (inverter power <=
55kW) 0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power>
55kW)
Motor parameters
★
451. b0.10
Asynchronous
motor no-load
current
0.01A to b0.03 (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.1A to b0.03 (inverter power> 55kW)
Motor parameters
★
452. b0.11 Synchronous motor stator resistance
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω (inverter power <=
55kW) 0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω (inverter power>
55kW)
- ★
453. b0.12 Synchronous D-axis
inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power <= 55kW)
0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter power> 55kW)
- ★
454. b0.13 Synchronous Q-axis inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power
<= 55kW) 0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter
power> 55kW)
- ★
455. b0.14 Synchronous motor
back-EMF 0.1V to 6553.5V - ★
456. b0.15 Reserved
Chapter 5 Function parameter
59
to b0.26
457. b0.27 Motor parameter
auto tunning
0: no operation 1: asynchronous motor parameters still
auto tunning
2: asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning
11: Synchronous motor parameters self-
learning with load 12:Synchronous motor parameters self-
learning without load
0 ★
458. b0.28 Encoder type
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: UVW incremental encoder
2: Rotational transformer
3: Sine and cosine encoder
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
0 ★
459. b0.29 Encoder every turn
pulse number 1 to 65535 2500 ★
460. b0.30 Encoder installation angle
0.00 to 359.90 0.00 ★
461. b0.31 ABZ incremental encoder AB phase
sequence
0: forward
1: reverse 0 ★
462. b0.32 UVW encoder offset
angle 0.00 to 359.90 0.0 ★
463. b0.33
UVW encoder
UVW phase
sequence
0: forward 1: reverse
0 ★
464. b0.34
Speed feedback PG
disconnection detection time
0.0s: OFF 0.1s to 10.0s
0.0s ★
465. b0.35 Pole-pairs of rotary
transformer 1 to 65535 1 ★
5-1-20.y0 Group - Function code management
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
466. y0.00 Parameter initialization
0: no operation
1: restore default parameter values, not including motor parameters
2: clear history
3: restore default parameter values, including motor parameters
4: backup current user parameters
501: restore from backup user parameters 10: Clear keyboard storage area3
11: upload parameter to keyboard storage
0 ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
60
area 13
12: upload parameter to keyboard storage
area 23
21: download the parameters from keyboard storage 1 area to the storage system 3
22: download the parameters from keyboard
storage 2 area to the storage system 3
467. y0.01 User password 0 to 65535 0 ☆
468. y0.02
Function parameter
group display selection
Units digit: d group display selection
0: not displays
1: displays Tens digit: E group display selection(the
same above)
Hundreds digit: b group display selection(the same above)
Thousands digit: y group display
selection(the same above) Tens thousands digit: L group display
selection(the same above)
11111 ★
469. y0.03
Personality
parameter group display selection
Units digit:User‟s customization parameter
display selection
0:not display 1:display
Tens digit :User‟s change parameter display
selection 0:not display
1:display
00 ☆
470. y0.04
Function code
modification
properties
0: modifiable 1: not modifiable
0 ☆
5-1-21.y1 Group - Fault query
No. Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chan
ge
471. y1.00 Type of the first fault
0: No fault
1: Inverter unit protection 2: Acceleration overcurrent
3: Deceleration overcurrent
4: Constant speed overcurrent 5: Acceleration overvoltage
6: Deceleration overvoltage
7: Constant speed overvoltage 8: Control power failure
9: Undervoltage
10: Inverter overload 11: Motor Overload
12: Input phase loss
13: Output phase loss 14: Module overheating
15: External fault
- ●
Chapter 5 Function parameter
61
16: Communication abnormal
17: Contactor abnormal
18: Current detection abnormal
19: Motor self-learning abnormal 20: Encoder/PG card abnormal
21: Parameter read and write abnormal
22: Inverter hardware abnormal 23: Motor short to ground
24: Reserved
25: Reserved 26: Running time arrival
27: Custom fault 1
28: Custom fault 2 29; Power-on time arrival
30: Load drop
31: PID feedback loss when running 40: Fast current limiting timeout
41: Switch motor when running
42: Too large speed deviation 43: Motor overspeed
45:Motor over-temperature
51:Initial position error COF: communication failure
472. y1.01 Type of the second fault - - ●
473. y1.02 Type of the third(at last) fault - - ●
474. y1.03 Frequency of the third(at last) fault - - ●
475. y1.04 Current of the third(at last) fault - - ●
476. y1.05 Bus voltage of the third(at last) fault - - ●
477. y1.06 Input terminal status of the third(at last) fault - - ●
478. y1.07 Output terminal status of the third(at last) fault - - ●
479. y1.08 Reserved
480. y1.09 Power-on time of the third(at last) fault - - ●
481. y1.10 Running time of the third(at last) fault - - ●
482. y1.11 Reserved
483. y1.12 Reserved
484. y1.13 Frequency of the second fault - - ●
485. y1.14 Current of the second fault - - ●
486. y1.15 Bus voltage of the second fault - - ●
487. y1.16 Input terminal status of the second fault - - ●
488. y1.17 Output terminal status of the second fault - - ●
489. y1.18 Reserved
Chapter 5 Function parameter
62
490. y1.19 Power-on time of the second fault - - ●
491. y1.20 Running time of the second fault - - ●
492. y1.21 Reserved
493. y1.22 Reserved
494. y1.23 Frequency of the first fault - - ●
495. y1.24 Current of the first fault - - ●
496. y1.25 Bus voltage of the first fault - - ●
497. y1.26 Input terminal status of the first fault - - ●
498. y1.27 Output terminal status of the first fault - - ●
499. y1.28 Reserved
500. y1.29 Power-on time of the first fault - - ●
501. y1.30 Running time of the first fault - - ●
5-2.Function parameter description
5-2-1.Basic monitoring parameters: d0.00-d0.41 d0 parameters group is used to monitor the inverter running status information, user can view
those information through the panel to facilitate on-site commissioning, also read parameters group
value via communication for host computer monitoring. For the specific parameters function code, name and the smallest unit , see Table 5-2.
Function
code Name Unit
d0.00 Running frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz
Frequency converter theory
d0.01 Set frequency (Hz) 0.01Hz
Actual set frequency
d0.02 Bus voltage (V) 0.1V
Detected value for DC bus voltage
d0.03 Output voltage (V) 1V
Actual output voltage
d0.04 Output current (A) 0.01A
Effective value for Actual motor current
d0.05 Output power (kW) 0.1kW
Calculated value for motor output power
d0.06 Output torque (%) 0.1%
Motor output torque percentage
d0.07 DI input status - DI input status, this value is a hexadecimal digits. The table listed each input terminal
status sequence for each bit:
0 to 10 bits Input terminal status
0 Invalid
1 Valid
Chapter 5 Function parameter
63
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 229 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Reserved
DI8
DI7
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
DI6
Reserved
Figure 5-1 DI Input status terminal sequence
d0.08 DO output status -
DO output status, this value is a hexadecimal digits. The table listed each output terminal status
sequence for each bit:
0 to 10 bits Output terminal status
0 Invalid
1 Valid
4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 24 3 2 1 0
SPB
Relay1
Undefined SPA
SPA
Relay2
Figure 5-2 Output status terminal sequence
d0.09 AI1 voltage (V) 0.01V
AI1 input voltage value
d0.10 AI2 voltage (V) 0.01V
AI2 input voltage value
d0.11 Panel potentiometer/AI3 voltage (V) 0.01V
Panel potentiometer input voltage value
d0.12 Count value -
Actual pulse count value in counting function
d0.13 Length value -
Actual length in fixed length function
d0.14 Actual speed -
Motor Actual running speed display
d0.15 PID setting %
Reference value percentage under PID adjustment mode
d0.16 PID feedback %
Feedback value percentage under PID adjustment mode
d0.17 PLC stage -
Stage display when PID program is running
d0.18 High-speed pulse input pulse frequency (Hz) 0.01kHz
Chapter 5 Function parameter
64
High-speed pulse input frequency display, unit: 0.01Khz
d0.19 Feedback speed(unit:0.1Hz) 0.01Hz
Actual output frequency of converter.
d0.20 Remaining run time 0.1Min
Remaining run time display, it is for timing run control
d0.21 Linear speed 1m/Min
Linear speed calculated from angular speed and diameter is used for controlling constant
tension and constant linear speed.
d0.22 Current power-on time 1Min
Total time of current inverter power-on
d0.23 Current run time 0.1Min
Total time of current inverter run
d0.24 High-speed pulse input pulse frequency 1Hz
High-speed pulse input frequency display, unit: 1hz
d0.25 Communication set value 0.01%
Frequency, torque or other command values set by communication port
d0.26 Encoder feedback speed 0.01Hz
PG feedback speed, to an accuracy of 0.01hz
d0.27 Master frequency setting display 0.01Hz
Frequency set by F0.03 master frequency setting source
d0.28 Auxiliary frequency setting display 0.01Hz
Frequency set by F0.04 auxiliary frequency setting source
d0.31 Synchro rotor position 0.0°
Current position angle of synchronous motor rotor
d0.29 Command torque (%) 0.1%
Display the set target torque under torque control mode
d0.32 Resolver position -
Rotor position when rotary transformer is used as a speed feedback
d0.33 ABZ position 0
Displays AB phase pulse count of the current ABZ or UVW encoder
d0.34 Z signal counter
Displays Z phase pulse count of the current ABZ or UVW encoder
d0.35 Inverter status
Displays inverter running status information
Data definition format is as follows:
d0.35
Bit0 0: stop; 1: forward; 2: reverse
Bit1
Bit2 0: constant; 1: acceleration; 2: deceleration
Bit3
Bit4 0: bus voltage normal; 1: undervoltage
d0.36 Inverter type -
1:G type: Suitable for constant torque load
2:F type: Suitable for variable torque load (fans, pumps load)
d0.37 AI1 voltage before correction 0.01V
d0.38 AI2 voltage before correction 0.01V
d0.39 Panel potentiometer /AI3 voltage before correction 0.01V d0.40 Reserved
d0.41 motor temperature inspection function3 0℃
Chapter 5 Function parameter
65
Motor temperature sensor signal,need connect to control board J16 terminal,connect
J15 to PT100. (9KRSCB.V5 and above needs to connect with CON60)
Note: “Superscript3 ”means software version of C3.00 and above with MCU keyboard
have such function.
5-2-2.Basic function group: F0.00-F0.27
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F0.00 Motor control mode
Vector control without PG 0
2 ★ Vector control with PG 1
V/F control 2
0:Vector control without PG
Refers to the open-loop vector control for high-performance control applications typically , only one inverter to drive a motor.
1: Vector control with PG
Refers to the closed-loop vector control, motor encoder client must be installed , the drive must be matching with the same type of PG encoder card . Suitable for high-precision speed
control or torque control . An inverter can drive only one motor.
2:V/F control Suitable for less precision control applications, such as fan and pump loads . Can be used
for an inverter drives several motors occasions.
Note: Vector control mode , the drive capacity and the level of non- motor capacity difference is too large , the drive motor can power level than the big two or a small one , or it
may result in performance degradation control , or the drive system does not work properly .
F0.01 Keyboard set frequency 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency) 50.00Hz ★
When "Digital Setting" or "Terminal UP/DOWN " is selected as frequency source, the parameter value is the initial value of the inverter frequency digital setting.
F0.02 Frequency command
resolution
0.1Hz 1 2 ★
0.01Hz 2
This parameter is used to determine the resolution of all related frequency parameters.
When the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz, PI9000 maximum output frequency can reach 3200Hz, when the frequency resolution is 0.01Hz , PI9000 maximum output frequency is
300.00Hz.
Note: when modifying the function parameters, the number of decimal places of all related frequency parameters will change displayed, the frequency value will change accordingly.
F0.03 Frequency source master
setting
Keyboard set frequency (F0.01,
UP/DOWN can be modified, power-down without memory)
0
1 ★
Keyboard set frequency (F0.01,
UP/DOWN can be modified,
power-down with memory) 1
Analog AI1 setting 2
Analog AI2 setting 3
Panel potentiometer setting 4
High-speed pulse setting 5
Multi-speed operation setting 6
Simple PLC program setting 7
PID control setting 8
Remote communications setting 9
Analog AI3 setting 10
Select inverter master reference frequency input channels. There are 10 master reference
frequency channels in all:
Chapter 5 Function parameter
66
0: Keyboard set frequency (F0.01, UP/DOWN can be modified, power-down without
memory)
Initial value for the set frequency is F0.01"preset frequency" value. The set frequency
value of the inverter can be changed by using the ▲ key and ▼ key on the keyboard (or multi-function input terminals UP, DOWN).
The Inverter powers down and then powers on again, the set frequency value will be
recovered as F0.01 "digital preset frequency value". 1: Keyboard set frequency (F0.01, UP/DOWN can be modified, power-down with
memory)
Initial value for the set frequency is F0.01"preset frequency" value. The set frequency value of the inverter can be changed by using the ▲ key and ▼ key on the keyboard (or multi-
function input terminals UP, DOWN).
The Inverter powers down and then powers on again, the set frequency value is same as the frequency of the last power-down
Please note that F0.09 is for "digital set frequency stop memory selection ”, F0.09 is used
to selectSAVE or CLEAR frequency correction when the inverter stops Besides, F0.09 is not related to the power-down memory but shutdown.
2: Analog AI1 setting
3: Analog AI2 setting 4: Panel potentiometer setting
Refers to that the frequency is determined by the analog input terminal, PI9000 control
panel provides two analog input terminals (AI1, AI2). Either 0V to 10V voltage input or 0mA to 20mA current input, it is selected by the jumper
on the control board.
The corresponding relationship between AI1, AI2 input voltage value and the target frequency can be set through F1 function code by user.
Panel potentiometer analog input voltage of 0V to 5V.
5: High-speed pulse setting Frequency reference is achieved via terminal pulse reference. Pulse reference signal
specifications: voltage range of 9V to 30V, frequency range of 0 kHz to 100kHz. Pulse
reference only can be inputted from the multi-function input terminal DI5. The relationship between DI5 terminal input pulse frequency and its corresponding setting can be set by F1.26 to
F1.29, the correspondence is based on a straight line between 2 points, the pulse input
corresponds to the set 100.0%, , it refers to the percent of F0.19 relative to maximum frequency 6: Multi-speed operation setting
When multi-stage command operation mode is selected, the different input state
combination of DI terminal correspond to the different set frequency value. PI9000 can set up more than 4 multi-stage command terminals and 16 statuses, and any 16 "multi-stage
commands "can be achieved correspondence through E1 group function code, the "multi-stage
command" refers to the percent of F0.19 relative to maximum frequency. Under the mode, DI terminal function in F1 group parameters will be required to set as the
multi-stage command.
7: Simple PLC program setting
Under the mode, the inverter operating frequency source can be switched between 1 to 16
any frequency commands, the user can set hold time and ac/deceleration time for 1to16
frequency command , the specific content refers to the related E1 group instructions. 8: PID control setting
Select process PID control output as the operating frequency. Generally it is used for
closed-loop control, such as constant pressure closed-loop control, constant tension closed-loop control and other occasions.
Select PID as the frequency source, you need to set E2 group "PID function" parameters.
9: Remote communications setting PI9000 supports Modbus communication.
Communication card must be installed when using the function.
10:9KRSCB.V5/9KRLCB.V5 and above provide analog AI3 input,voltage input range-
Chapter 5 Function parameter
67
10V to +10V.
F0.04 Frequency source auxiliary setting
Keyboard set frequency (F0.01, UP/DOWN can be modified,
power-down without memory) 0
0 ★
Keyboard set frequency (F0.01, UP/DOWN can be modified,
power-down with memory) 1
Analog AI1 setting 2
Analog AI2 setting 3
Panel potentiometer setting 4
High-speed pulse setting 5
Multi-speed operation setting 6
Simple PLC program setting 7
PID control setting 8
Remote communications setting 9
Analog AI3 setting 10
The instructions for use refers to F0.03.
When the frequency source auxiliary setting is used as overlays reference (select frequency
source as master+auxiliary , master to master+auxiliary or auxiliary to master+auxiliary ), you need to pay attention to:
1) When the frequency source auxiliary setting is set to digital reference, the preset
frequency (F0.01) does not work, user can adjust frequency by using ▲, ▼ keys (or multi-function input terminals UP, DOWN) on the keyboard, adjust directly on the basis of master
frequency source.
2) When the frequency source auxiliary setting is set to analog input reference (AI1, AI2, panel potentiometer/AI3) or pulse input reference, the frequency source auxiliary setting range
for the set 100% can be set by F0.05 and F0.06.
3) When the frequency source is set to pulse input reference, it is similar to analog reference . Tip: Both master and auxiliary setting of frequency source can not be set in the same
channel, ie F0.03 and F0.04 can not be set as the same value, otherwise easily lead to confusion.
F0.05
Reference object
selection for frequency source auxiliary setting
Relative to maximum frequency 0
0 ☆ Relative to master frequency source A 1
Relative to master frequency source 2 2
F0.06 Frequency source
auxiliary setting range 0% to 150% 100% ☆
When the frequency source is set to "frequency overlay"(i.e. F0.07 is set to 1, 3 or 4), these two parameters are used to determine the range of adjustment of frequency source auxiliary
setting.
F0.05 is used to determine the object corresponding to frequency source auxiliary setting range, either the maximum frequency or the frequency source master setting,If the frequency
source master setting 1 is selected, so the frequency source auxiliary setting range will be
subject to the change of the frequency source master setting, it applies for when auxiliary setting range is less than master setting range; If the frequency source master setting 2 is
selected, so the frequency source auxiliary setting range will be subject to the change of the
frequency source master setting, it applies for when auxiliary setting range is more than master setting range;
Recommendation: frequency source master setting (F0.03) shall adopt analog setting,
frequency source auxiliary setting (F0.04) shall adopt digital setting.
F0.07 Frequency source
superimposed selection
Units digit Frequency source selection
00 ☆ Frequency source master setting 0
Arithmetic result of master and auxiliary(arithmetic relationship depends
1
Chapter 5 Function parameter
68
on tens digit)
switch between frequency source master setting and auxiliary setting
2
Switch between frequency source master
setting and arithmetic result of master and auxiliary
3
Switch between frequency source
auxiliary setting and arithmetic result of
master and auxiliary 4
Tens
digit
Arithmetic relationship of master
and auxiliary for frequency source
Master+auxiliary 0
Master-auxiliary 1
Max(master, auxiliary) 2
Min (master, auxiliary) 3
Master*auxiliary/ maximum frequency 4
Frequency source reference is achieved by compounding frequency source master setting
and frequency source auxiliary setting
Units digit: frequency source selection: 0: Frequency source master setting
Frequency source master setting is used as command frequency
1: Arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is used as command frequency, for the arithmetic relationship of master and auxiliary, please see the instructions of function code "tens
digit".
2: Switch between frequency source master setting and auxiliary setting, when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is invalid, the frequency source master setting
is selected as command frequency. when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching)
is valid, frequency source auxiliary setting is selected as command frequency.
3: Switch between the frequency source master setting and the arithmetic result of master
and auxiliary, when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is invalid, the
frequency source master setting is selected as command frequency. When multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is valid, the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is
selected as command frequency.
4: Switch between the frequency source auxiliary setting and the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary, when multi-function input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is invalid,
the frequency source auxiliary setting is selected as command frequency. When multi-function
input terminal 18 (frequency switching) is valid, the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is selected as command frequency.
Tens digit: arithmetic relationship of master and auxiliary for frequency source
0: frequency source master setting + frequency source auxiliary setting The sum of frequency source master setting plus frequency source auxiliary setting is used
as command frequency Achieve frequency overlay reference function.
1: frequency source master setting - frequency source auxiliary setting The difference of frequency source master setting minus frequency source auxiliary setting
is used as command frequency
2: MAX (master and auxiliary) take the largest absolute value in frequency source master setting and frequency source auxiliary setting as command frequency.
3: MIN (master and auxiliary) take the smallest absolute value in frequency source master
setting and frequency source auxiliary setting as command frequency. In addition, when the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is selected as frequency source, you can set offset
frequency by F0.08 and overlay offset frequency to the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary,
so as to respond flexibly to various needs. 4: frequency source master setting X frequency source auxiliary setting and divided by the
maximum value of frequency as the frequency command.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
69
F0.08 Frequency source offset
frequency when superimposing
0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum
frequency)
0.00
Hz ☆
The function code is only valid when the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is selected as frequency source.
When the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary is selected as frequency source, F0.08 is
used as offset frequency, and it overlays with the arithmetic result of master and auxiliary as the set value of final frequency so that the frequency setting can be more flexible.
F0.09 Shutdown memory selection for
digital set frequency
W/O memory 0 1 ☆
W/ memory 1
This feature is only frequency source for the digital set.
"W/O memory" refers to that the digital set frequency value will recovered to F0.01 (preset frequency) value when the inverter stops, and the frequency correction by the ▲/▼ key on the
keyboard or terminals UP, DOWN is cleared.
"W/ memory" refers to that the digital set frequency is reserved when the inverter stops, and the frequency correction by the ▲/▼ key on the keyboard or terminals UP, DOWN
remains valid.
F0.10 Frequency command UP / DOWN reference when running
Running frequency 0 0 ★
Set frequency 1
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is the digital set value.
when determining the keyboard ▲ ▼ keys or terminal UP/DOWN action, the method to correct the set frequency that is, the target frequency decreases or increases on the basis of the
operating frequency or the set frequency.
The obvious difference between two settings appears when the inverter is in the process of ac/deceleration, that is, if the inverter operating frequency is not same as the set frequency, the
different choices of the parameters has very different effect.
F0.11 Command source
selection
Keyboard control (LED off) 0
0 ☆
Terminal block control (LED on) 1
Communications command control
(LED flashes) 2
Keyboard control+
Communications command control 3
Keyboard control+
Communications command
control+ Terminal block control
4
Select inverter control command input channel. Inverter control commands include: start,
stop, forward, reverse and jog, etc.
0: keyboard control ("LOCAL / REMOTE" lights out); Operate command control by using RUN, STOP/RESET Keys on the operation panel.
1: terminal block control ("LOCAL / REMOTE" lights up);
Operate command control by using multi-function input terminals FWD, REV or FJOG. 2: communication command control("LOCAL / REMOTE" flashes)
Gives the run command from the host computer through the means of communication.
Select this option, the optional communication card(Modbus card) is required . 3.keyboard+communication command control
Operation panel and communication command control.
4.keyboard+terminal block+communication command control
Operation panel、terminal block and communication command control.
F0.12 Binding frequency source
for command source
Units
digit
Keyboard command binding
frequency source selection
000 ☆ Not binded 0
Keyboard set frequency 1
AI1 2
AI2 3
Chapter 5 Function parameter
70
Panel potentiometer 4
High-speed pulse setting 5
Multi-speed 6
Simple PLC 7
PID 8
Communications reference 9
Tens
digit
Terminal block command binding frequency source
selection (0 to 9, same as units
digit)
Hundre
ds digit
Communication command binding frequency source
selection (0 to 9, same as units
digit)
Define the combination of 3 operation command channels and 9 frequency reference
channels for easily synchronously switching.
The principle for above frequency source reference channel is same as frequency source master setting selection F0.03, please see the description of F0.03 function code. The different
running command channel can be bundled with the same frequency reference channel. When
command source has the available frequency source for bundling, in the valid period of command source , the set frequency source by F0.03 to F0.07 is no longer valid.
F0.13 Acceleration time 1 0.00s to 6500s - ☆
F0.14 Deceleration time 1 0.00s to 6500s - ☆
Acceleration time refers to the required time when the inverter accelerates from zero
frequency to F0.16.
Deceleration time refers to the required time when the inverter decelerates from F0.16 to zero frequency.
PI9000 provides four groups of ac/deceleration time, user can select by using the digital
input terminal DI, as follows:
The first group: F0.13, F0.14;
The second group: F7.08, F7.09; The third group: F7.10, F7.11;
The fourth group: F7.12, F7.13.
F0.15 Ac/Deceleration time unit
1 second 0
1 ★ 0.1 second 1
0.01 second 2
To meet the demand of the various on-site, PI9000 provides three kinds of time unit: 1
second, 0.1 second and 0.01 second respectively.
Note: when modifying the function parameters, the number of decimal places that the four groups of ac/deceleration time displayed will change displayed, the ac/deceleration time will
change accordingly.
F0.16 Ac/deceleration time
reference frequency
Maximum frequency(F0.19) 0
0 ★ Set frequency 1
100Hz 2
Ac/deceleration time refers to the required time from zero frequency to F0.16 or from
F0.16 to zero frequency.
When F0.16 selects 1, the ac/deceleration time depends on the set frequency, if the set frequency change frequently, and the acceleration of the motor is varied, please use with
caution.
F0.17 Carrier frequency adjustment as per temperature
NO 0 0 ☆
YES 1
The adjustment of carrier frequency refers to that inverter detects a certain extent than the
rated load, automatically reduce the carrier frequency in order to reduce the drive temperature.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
71
When the load is reduced to a certain extent, the carrier frequency is gradually restored to the
set value. This feature can reduce the chance of drive overheating alarm.
F0.18 Carrier Frequency 0.5kHz to 16.0kHz - ☆
This function adjusts the carrier frequency. By adjusting the carrier frequency can reduce motor noise, avoid thevibration point of the mechanical system, reduce line-to-ground leakage
current and the interference to the inverter.
When the carrier frequency is low, the output current higher harmonic component increases, the motor loss increases, the motor temperature increases.
When a higher carrier frequency, motor loss is reduced, the motor temperature decreases,
but the inverter loss increases, inverter temperature rise and interference increases. The adjustment of carrier frequency will have impacts on the following performances:
Carrier Frequency Low → high
Motor noise Large → small
Output current waveform Poor → good
Motor temperature High → low
Inverter temperature Low → high
Leakage current Small → large
External radiation and interference Small → large
Different power inverter, the carrier frequency of the factory settings are different. Although the user can modify, but note: If the value of the carrier frequency higher than the
factory set , it will cause the drive to increase the radiator temperature, then the user needs to
drive derating, otherwise there is the danger of overheating alarm.
F0.19 Maximum output frequency 50.00Hz to 320.00Hz 50.00Hz ★
If analog input, pulse input (DI5) or multi-stage command in PI9000 is selected as frequency source, the respective 100.0% is calibrated relative to the parameter.
When PI9000 maximum output frequency reaches up to 3200Hz, in order to take into
account the two indexes of frequency command resolution and frequency input range, the number of decimal places for frequency command can be selected by F0.02 .
When F0.02 selects 1, the frequency resolution is 0.1Hz, at this time F0.19 can be set in
the range from 50.0Hz to 3200.0Hz; When F0.02 selects 2, the frequency resolution is 0.01Hz, at this time F0.19 can be set in the range from 50.00Hz to 320.00Hz.
F0.20 Upper limit frequency
source
F0.21 setting 0
0 ★
AI1 1
AI2 2
Panel potentiometer setting 3
High-speed pulse setting 4
Communications reference 5
Analog AI3 setting 6
Setting upper limit frequency. The upper limit frequency can be set from either digital
setting (F0.21) or analog input channels. If the upper limit frequency is set from analog input,
the set 100% of analog input is relative to F0.19.
To avoid the "Runaway", the setting of upper limit frequency is required, when the inverter
reaches up to the set upper limit frequency value, the inverter will remain operation at the upper limit frequency, no further increase.
F0.21 Upper limit frequency F0.23 (lower limit frequency) to F0.19
(maximum frequency) 50.00Hz ☆
F0.22 Upper limit frequency
offset
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
When the upper limit frequency is set from the analog or the high-speed pulse, F0.22 will
be used as the offset of set value, the overlay of the offset frequency and F0.20 is used as the set value of the final upper limit frequency.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
72
F0.23 Lower limit frequency 0.00Hz to F0.21 (lower limit frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
When the frequency command is lower than the lower limit frequency set by F0.23, the
inverter can shut down, and then run at the lower limit frequency or the zero speed, the running
mode can be set by F7.18.
F0.24 Running direction Same direction 0
0 ☆ Opposite direction 1
By changing the parameters, the motor steering can be achieved without changing the
motor wiring, which acts as the adjustment of any two lines(U, V, W) of the motor to achieve
the conversion of the motor rotation direction. Tip: after the parameter is initialized, the motor running direction will be restored to its
original status. When the system debugging is completed, please use with caution where the
change of motor steering is strictly prohibited.
F0.25 Reserved
F0.26 Reserved
0.01Hz 0
1 ☆ 0.05Hz 1
0.1Hz 2
0.5Hz 3
F0.27 Inverter type G type (constant torque load type) 1
1 ● F type (fans/pumps load type) 2
The parameters is only for user to view the factory model and can not be changed.
1: Suitable for constant torque load 2: Suitable for variable torque load (fans, pumps load)
5-2-3.Input terminals: F1.00-F1.46 PI9000 series inverter of below 11KW is equipped with 6 multi-function digital input
terminals, the inverter of above 11KW is equipped with 8 multi-function digital input terminal (of
which DI5 can be used as a high-speed pulse input terminal ), and 2 analog input terminals.
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F1.00 DI1 terminal function selection 0 to 51 1
★
F1.01 DI2 terminal function selection 0 to 51 2
F1.02 DI3 terminal function selection 0 to 51 8
F1.03 DI4 terminal function selection 0 to 51 9
F1.04 DI5 terminal function selection 0 to 51 12
F1.05 DI6 terminal function selection 0 to 51 13
F1.06 DI7 terminal function selection 0 to 51 0
F1.07 DI8 terminal function selection 0 to 51 0
F1.08 Undefined
F1.09 Undefined
These parameters are used to set the digital multi-function input terminal, the optional
functions are shown in the following table:
Set value Function Description
0 No function The terminal for not use can be set to "no function" to prevent
accidental operation.
1 Forward run (FWD) External terminals are used to control the FWD/REV run
mode of inverter. 2 Reverse run (REV)
3 Three-wire operation
control
This terminal is used to determine the inverter's three-wire control mode. For details, please refer to the instructions of
function code F1.10 ("terminal command mode).
4 Forward JOG(FJOG) FJOG means Forward JOG running, RJOG means Reverse JOG running. For Jog running frequency and Jog
Ac/deceleration time, please refer to the description of the 5 Reverse JOG(RJOG)
Chapter 5 Function parameter
73
function code F7.00, F7.01, F7.02.
6 Terminal UP Modify frequency increment/decrement command when the frequency is referenced by external terminal. Adjust up/down
the set frequency when the digital setting is selected as the
frequency source. 7 Terminal DOWN
8 Free stop The inverter output is blocked, at the time, the parking process of motor is not controlled by the inverter. This way is
same as the principle of free stop described in F3.07.
9 Fault reset (RESET) The function make use of terminal for fault reset. It has same function with RESET key on the keyboard. This function can
be used to realize remote fault reset.
10 Run pausing
The inverter slows down and stops, but all operating
parameters are memorized. Such as PLC parameters, wobbulate frequency parameters, and PID parameters. This
terminal signal disappears, the inverter reverts to the previous
state of running before parking.
11 External fault normally
open input
When the signal is sent to the inverter, the inverter reports
fault Err.15, and performs troubleshooting according to fault
protection action (for details, please refer to the function code F8.17).
12 Multi-speed terminal 1 The setting of 16 stage speed or 16 kinds of other command can be achieved through the 16 states of the four terminals.
For details, see Table 1
13 Multi-speed terminal 2
14 Multi-speed terminal 3
15 Multi-speed terminal 4
16 Ac/deceleration time selection terminal 1
The selection of 4 ac/deceleration times can be achieved
through the 4 states of the two terminals. For details, see Table 2 17
Ac/deceleration time
selection terminal 2
18 Frequency source
switching
Used to switch between different frequency sources.
According to frequency source selection function code
(F0.07) settings, the terminal is used to switch between two frequency sources.
19 UP/DOWN setting
(terminal, keyboard)
When the frequency reference is the digital frequency, this
terminal is used to clear the changed frequency value by
terminal UP/DOWN or keyboard UP/DOWN, so that the reference frequency can recover to the set value of F0.01.
20 Run command switch
terminal
When the command source is set to the terminal control
(F0.11 = 1), the terminal can be used to switch between terminal control and keyboard control.
When the command source is set to the communication
control (F0.11 = 2), the terminal can be used to switch between communication control and keyboard control.
21 Ac/deceleration
prohibited
Ensure the inverter is free from external signals affect (except
for shutdown command), maintain current output frequency.
22 PID pause PID is temporarily disabled, the inverter maintains current output frequency, no longer performs PID adjustment of
frequency source.
23 PLC status reset When PLC pauses and runs again, this terminal is used to
reset the inverter to the initial state of simple PLC.
24 Wobbulate pause When the inverter outputs at center frequency. Wobbulate will
pause
25 Counter input Input terminal of the count pulse
26 Counter reset Clear counter status
27 Length count input Input terminal of the length count.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
74
28 Length reset Clear length
29 Torque control prohibited
When the inverter torque control is prohibited, the inverter will enter speed control mode.
30 High-speed pulse input
(only valid for DI5 ) DI5 is used as pulse input terminal.
31 Reserved Reserved
32 Immediately DC braking
If the terminal is active, the inverter switches directly to DC braking status
33 External fault normally
closed input
When the signal of external fault normally closed input is
inputted into the inverter, the inverter will report fault Err.15 and shutdown.
34 Frequency change enable
If the function is set to be valid, when the frequency changes,
the inverter does not respond to frequency changes until the
terminal state is invalid.
35 PID action direction as
reverse
If the terminal is valid, PID action direction opposites to the
direction set by E2.03
36 External parking
terminal 1
Under keyboard control mode, the terminal can be used to
stop the inverter, same as STOP key on the keyboard.
37 Control command
switch terminal 2
Used to switch between terminal control and communication
control. If the command source is selected as terminal
control, the system will be switched to the communication control mode when the terminal is active; vice versa.
38 PID integral pause
When the terminal is active, the PID integral adjustment
function is paused, but the proportion and differential
adjustments of PID are still valid.
39
Switch between
frequency source
master setting and
preset frequency
When the terminal is active, the frequency source A is
replaced by the preset frequency (F0.01)
40
Switch between
frequency source auxiliary setting and
preset frequency
When the terminal is active, the frequency source B is
replaced with the preset frequency (F0.01)
41 Reserved
42 Reserved
43 PID parameter
switching
When DI terminal (E2.19 = 1) is used to switch PID parameters, if the terminal is invalid, PID parameters use
E2.13 to E2.15; if the terminal is valid, PID parameters use
E2.16 to E2.18
44 Customized definition
fault 1 When fault 1 and fault 2 are active, the inverter respectively alarms fault Err.27 and fault Err.28, and deals with them
according to the mode selected by the fault protection action F8.19.
45 Customized definition
fault 2
46 Speed control / torque
control switching
Switch between speed control mode and torque control
mode under vector control mode. If the terminal is invalid,
the inverter will run at the mode defined by E0.00 (speed/torque control mode); if the terminal is valid, the
inverter will be switched to another mode.
47 Emergency parking
If the terminal is valid, the inverter will park at the fastest
speed, and the current maintains at the set upper limit during the parking process. This function is used to meet the
requirements that the inverter needs to stop as soon as
possible when the system is in a emergency state.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
75
48 External parking terminal 2
In any control mode (keyboard control, terminal control,
communication control), the terminal can be used to decelerate the inverter until stop, at the time the deceleration
time is fixed for deceleration time 4.
49 Deceleration DC
braking
If the terminal is valid, firstly the inverter decelerates to the initial frequency of stop DC braking, and then switches
directly to DC braking status.
50 Clear current running
time
If the terminal is valid, the inverter's current running time is
cleared, the function needs to work with Timing run (F7.42) and current running time arrival(F7.45).
51 Jog order3(set F7.54 ) Jog running order,direction set through F7.54
Note: “Superscript3 ”means software version of C3.00 and above with MCU keyboard have
such function.
Table 1 Function description of multi-stage command
The 4 multi-stage command terminals can be combined as 16 status, these 16 status have
16 command set values. As shown in Table 1:
K4 K3 K2 K1 Command setting Parameters
OFF OFF OFF OFF 0-stage speed setting 0X E1.00
OFF OFF OFF ON 1-stage speed setting 1X E1.01
OFF OFF ON OFF 2-stage speed setting 2X E1.02
OFF OFF ON ON 3-stage speed setting 3X E1.03
OFF ON OFF OFF 4-stage speed setting 4X E1.04
OFF ON OFF ON 5-stage speed setting 5X E1.05
OFF ON ON OFF 6-stage speed setting 6X E1.06
OFF ON ON ON 7-stage speed setting 7X E1.07
ON OFF OFF OFF 8-stage speed setting 8X E1.08
ON OFF OFF ON 9-stage speed setting 9X E1.09
ON OFF ON OFF 10-stage speed setting 10X E1.10
ON OFF ON ON 11-stage speed setting 11X E1.11
ON ON OFF OFF 12-stage speed setting 12X E1.12
ON ON OFF ON 13-stage speed setting 13X E1.13
ON ON ON OFF 14-stage speed setting 14X E1.14
ON ON ON ON 15-stage speed setting 15X E1.15
When multi-speed is selected as frequency source, the 100.0% of function code E1.00 to E1.15 corresponds to maximum frequency F0.19. Multi-stage command is used for the function
of multi-speed, also for PID reference source to meet the need to switch between different
reference values. Table 2 - function description of ac/deceleration time selection terminal
Terminal 2 Terminal 1 Ac/deceleration time selection Parameters
OFF OFF Acceleration time 1 F0.13, F0.14
Chapter 5 Function parameter
76
OFF ON Acceleration time 2 F7.08, F7.09
ON OFF Acceleration time 3 F7.10, F7.11
ON ON Acceleration time 4 F7.12, F7.13
F1.10 Terminal command mode
Two-wire type 1 0
0 ★ Two-wire type 2 1
Three-wire type 1 2
Three-wire type 2 3
This parameter defines four different modes to control inverter operation through external
terminals.0: Two-wire type 1
This mode is the most commonly used two-wire mode. The forward/reverse operation of motor is determined by terminal DIx, DIy.
The terminal function is set as follows:
Terminals Set value Description
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV)
Of which, DIx and DIy are the multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, the level is
active.
K1
K2
DIx
DIy
COM
Forward(FWD)
Reverse(REV)
DigitalCommon
terminals
K1 K2 Command
0 Stop
0 1 REV
1 0 FWD
1 1 Stop
0
Figure 5-3 Two-wire mode 1
1: Two-wire type 2
In the mode, DIx terminal is used as running enabled, while DIy terminal is used to
determine running direction. The terminal function is set as follows:
Terminals Set value Description
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV)
Of which, DIx and DIy are the multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, the level is active.
K1
K2
DIx
DIy
COM
Forward(FWD)
Reverse(REV)
DigitalCommon
terminals
K1 K2 Command
0 Stop
0 1 Stop
1 0 FWD
1 1 REV
0
Figure 5-4 Two-wire mode 2
2: Three-wire control mode 1 In the mode, DIn is used as enabled terminal, while DIx, DIy terminal are used to control
direction. The terminal function is set as follows:
Terminals Set value Description
Chapter 5 Function parameter
77
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV)
DIn 3 Three-wire operation control
To run, firstly close DIn terminal, the forward or reverse of motor is controlled by the
ascendant edge of DIx or DIy pulse
To stop, you must disconnect DIn terminal signals Of which, DIx, DIy and DIn are the multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, DIx and DIy are for active pulse, DIn is for
active level.
DIx
DIy
COM
SB2
DIn
Forward run
Three-wire operation
control
Reverse run
Digital common
terminals
SB1
SB3
Figure 5-5 Three-wire control mode 1
Of which: SB1: Stop button SB2: Forward button SB3: Reverse button
3: Three-wire control mode 2
In the mode, DIn is the enabled terminal, the running commands are given by DIx, the direction is determined by the state of DIy.
The terminal function is set as follows:
Terminals Set value Description
DIx 1 Forward run (FWD)
DIy 2 Reverse run (REV)
DIn 3 Three-wire operation control
To run, firstly close DIn terminal, the motor run signal is generated by the ascendant edge
of DIx, the motor direction signal is generated by DIy status To stop, you must disconnect DIn terminal signals Of which, DIx, DIy and DIn are the
multi-function input terminals of DI1 to DI10, DIx is for active pulse, DIy and DIn are for
active level.
DIx
DIn
DIy
COM
Forward
Three-wire
operation
Digital common
Reverse
SB2
SB1
K
K Command
0
1
FWD
REV
Figure 5-6 Three-wire control mode 2
Of which:
SB1: Stop button SB2: Run button
F1.11 Terminal UP / DOWN
change rate 0.01Hz/s to 65.535Hz/s 1.000Hz/s ☆
Used to set terminal UP/DOWN adjustment frequency, the rate of frequency change, i.e.
frequency change amount per second.
When F0.02 (frequency decimal point) is 2, the value range is 0.001Hz/s to 65.535Hz/s. When F0.22 (frequency decimal point) is 1, the value range is 0.01Hz/s to 655.35Hz/s.
F1.12 Minimum input value for 0.00V to F1.14 0.30V ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
78
AI curve 1
F1.13 Minimum input setting for AI curve 1
-100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
F1.14 Maximum input for AI
curve 1 F1.12 to 10.00V 10.00V ☆
F1.15 Maximum input setting for AI curve 1
-100.0% to 100.0% 100.0% ☆
The above function codes are used to set the relationship between analog input voltage and
its representatives set value. When the analog input voltage is more than the set Maximum Input (F1.14), the analog
voltage takes the Maximum Input as the calculated value, Similarly, when the analog input
voltage is less than the set Minimum Input (F1.12), according to the Setting Selection For AI Less Than Minimum Input (F1.25), the analog voltage takes Minimal Input or 0.0% as the
calculated value.
When the analog input is the current input, 1mA current is equivalent to 0.5V voltage.
AI1 input filter time is used to set AI1 software filter time, When the on-site analog
quantity is easily interfered, please increase the filter time to stabilize the detected analog
quantity, but the greater filter time, the slower analog detection response, the proper setting method depends on the actual application.
In the different applications, the 100.0% of analog setting vary from the meaning of its
corresponding nominal value, please refer to the description of each application for details. The three legends are for three typical settings.
100%
A1
Corresponding set up
(Frequency,torque)
10V(20mA)0V(0mA)
100%
A1
10V(20mA)0V(0mA)
-100%
Corresponding set up
(Frequency,torque)
Chapter 5 Function parameter
79
100%
AI3
Corresponding setup
(Frequency,torque)
+10V0V
-100%
-10V
Figure 5-7 Relationship between analog reference and set amount
F1.16 Minimum input value for AI curve 2
0.00V to F1.18 0.00V ☆
F1.17 Minimum input setting for AI
curve 2 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
F1.18 Maximum input for AI curve 2 F1.16 to 10.00V 10.00V ☆
F1.19 Maximum input setting for AI
curve 2 -100.0% to 100.0% 100.0% ☆
For the function and use of curve 2, please refer to the description of curve 1.
F1.20 Minimum input value for AI curve 3 0.00V to F1.22 0.00V ☆
F1.21 Minimum input setting for AI curve 3 -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
F1.22 Maximum input for AI curve 3 F1.20 to 10.00V 10.00V ☆
F1.23 Maximum input setting for AI curve 3 -100.0% to 100.0% 100.0% ☆
For the function and use of curve 3, please refer to the description of curve 1.
F1.24 AI curve selection
Units digit
AI1 curve selection
0x321 ☆
Curve 1 (2 points, see F1.12
to F1.15) 1
Curve 2 (2 points, see F1.16 to F1.19)
2
Curve 3 (2 points, see F1.20
to F1.23) 3
Tens digit
AI2 curve selection (1 to 3, as above)
Hundred
s digit
Panel potentiometer
/AI3 curve selection (1 to 3, as above)
Units digit, tens digit and hundreds digit of the function code are used to respectively
select the corresponding set curves of analog input AI1, AI2, Panel potentiometer
3 analog input can respectively select any one of 3 curves. Curve 1, curve 2 and curve 3 are 2-point curve, they are set in F1 function code.
F1.25 Setting selection for AI
less than minimum input
Units
digit
Setting selection for AI1
less than minimum input
0x00 ☆ The corresponding minimum input setting
0
0.0% 1
Tens Setting selection for AI2
Chapter 5 Function parameter
80
digit less than minimum
input(0 to 1, ditto)
Hundred
s digit
Setting selection for panel
potentiometer/AI3 less
than minimum input(0 to 1, ditto)
The function code is used to set analog quantity and its corresponding setting when the
analog input voltage is less than the set Minimum Input. Units digit, tens digit and hundreds digit the function code respectively correspond to the
analog input AI1, AI2, panel potentiometer. If 0 is selected, when the analog input is less than
the Minimum Input, the setting corresponding to the analog amount is the setting of minimum input of the function code curve (F1.13, F1.17, F1.21).
If 1 is selected, when the analog input is less than the minimum input, the setting
corresponding to the analog amount is 0.0%.
F1.26 Minimum pulse input frequency 0.00kHz to F1.28 0.00kHz ☆
F1.27 Minimum pulse input frequency
setting -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
F1.28 Maximum pulse input frequency F1.26 to +100.00kHz 50.00kHz ☆
F1.29 Maximum pulse input frequency
setting -100.0% to +100.0% 100.0% ☆
This group function code is used to set the relationship between DI5 pulse frequency and its corresponding setting.
Pulse frequency can be inputted into the inverter only through DI5 channel. The
application on this group of functions is similar to curve 1, please refer to the description of curve 1.
F1.30 DI filter time 0.000s to 1.000s 0.010s ☆
Set software filter time for DI terminals status. For the application that input terminals are
vulnerable to interference and cause the accidental operation, you can increase this parameter so
as to enhance the anti-interference ability. However, the increase of filter time will cause DI
terminal slow response.
F1.31 AI1 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
F1.32 AI2 filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
F1.33 Filtering time of panel
potentiometer/AI3 0.00s to 10.00s 0.10s ☆
F1.34 Filter time of pulse input 0.00s to 10.00s 0.00s ☆
F1.35 DI terminal valid mode selection 1
Units
digit
DI1 terminal active
status setting
00000 ★ High level active 0
Low level active 1
Tens digit
DI2 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1,
as above)
Hundreds
digit
DI3 terminal active status setting (0 to 1,
as above)
Thousands
digit
DI4 terminal active status setting (0 to 1,
as above)
Ten
thousands
DI5 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1, as above)
Chapter 5 Function parameter
81
digit
F1.36 DI terminal valid mode selection 2
Units digit
DI6 terminal active status setting
0 ★
High level active 0
Low level active 1
Tens
digit
DI7 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1, as above)
Hund
reds
digit
DI8 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1, as
above)
Thou
sands
digit
DI9 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1, as
above)
Ten thous
ands
digit
DI10 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1, as above)
Used to set the digital input terminal active status mode. If high level is selected as active,
it is active when the corresponding DI terminal and COM are connected, disconnected for
inactive. If low level is selected as active, it is inactive when the corresponding DI terminal and COM are connected, disconnected for active.
F1.37 DI1 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
F1.38 DI2 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
F1.39 DI3 delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ★
Used to set the inverter's delay time for the change of DI terminal status
Currently only DI1, DI2, DI3 terminals can set the delay time function.
F1.40 Define the input terminal repeat 0: Unrepeatable;1: repeatable 0 ★
0: Unrepeatable Two different multi-function input terminals can not be set to the same
function.
1: Repeatable Two different multi-function input terminals can be set to the same function.
F1.41 Keyboard potentiometer X13 0~100.00% 0.00% ☆
Keyboard potentiometer set value start point
F1.42 Keyboard potentiometer X23 0~100.00% 100.00% ☆
Keyboard potentiometer set value end point
F1.43 Keyboard potentiometer set value3 0~100.00% - ☆
Display keyboard potentiometer value, through the keyboard potentiometer can modify Settings under monitoring menu.
Keyboard potentiometer Settings can be used as frequency analogy, setting frequency =
maximum frequency x keyboard potentiometer Settings.
Eg.:Keyboard potentiometer Settings can be used as a PID given value,PID given
value= Keyboard potentiometer Settings.
F1.44 Keyboard potentiometer X1
corresponding value Y13 -100.00%~+100.00% 0.00% ☆
F1.45 Keyboard potentiometer X2
corresponding value Y23 -100.00%~+100.00% 100.00% ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
82
The end of the
corresponding
value
endstart
The start of the
corresponding
value
The end of the
corresponding
value
startend
The start of the
corresponding
value
Figure 5-8 Keyboard potentiometer X corresponding value Y
F1.46 Keyboard potentiometer
control3
Bits Keyboard potentiometer
power down reserve state
00 ☆
Power down protection 0
Power down zero clear 1
Ten bits Keyboard potentiometer set stop keep
Stop keep 0
Stop order zero clear 1
Stop over zero clear 2
Hundred bits
Reserved
Thousand
bits Reserved
Note: “Superscript3 ”means software version of C3.00 and above with MCU keyboard have such function.
5-2-4.Output terminals: F2.00-F2.19
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F2.00 SPB terminal output mode selection
High-speed pulse output 0 0 ☆
Switching quantity output 1
SPB terminal is a programmable complex terminals, it can be used as an output terminal of high-speed pulse, also an switching output terminal of collector open circuit.
As a high-speed pulse output, the highest frequency of output pulse is 100kHz, please see
the instructions of F2.06 for high-speed pulse output function.
F2.01
Switching quantity output function selection (collector Open circuit output
terminals) 0 to 40 0 ☆
F2.02 Relay 1 output function selection
(TA1.TB1.TC1) 0 to 40 2 ☆
F2.03 Undefined
F2.04 SPA output function selection (collector Open circuit output terminals) 0 to 40 1 ☆
F2.05 Relay 2 output function selection
(TA2.TB2.TC2) 0 to 40 1 ☆
The above five function codes are used to select five digital output functions. Multifunction
output terminal function is described as follows:
Set value
Function Description
0 No output No output action
Chapter 5 Function parameter
83
1 Inverter in service The inverter is in operation with output frequency (zero),
and outputs ON signal.
2 Fault output (fault
shutdown)
When the inverter occurs failure and stops, and outputs
ON signal.
3 Frequency level
detection FDT1 output
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.23,
F7.24
4 Frequency arrival Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.25
5
Zero speed running
(shutdown without
output)
Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in operation with
output frequency (zero) Outputs OFF signal when the
inverter is in the sate of stop
6 Motor overload pre-
alarm
Before motor overload protection action, it will output
ON signal if it exceeds the pre-alarm threshold. Please
refer to function code F8.02 to F8.04. for motor overload parameter setting.
7 Inverter overload pre-
alarm
Outputs ON signal within 10s before inverter overload
protection action
8 Set count value arrival Outputs ON signal when the count value reaches the value set by E0.08.
9 Specified count value
arrival
Outputs ON signal when the count value reaches the
value set by E0.09. Please refer to the instructions of E0 group for counting function.
10 Length arrival Outputs ON signal when the detected Actual length
exceeds the set length by E0.05.
11 PLC cycle completed Outputs a width of 250ms pulse signal when simple PLC completes a cycle
12 Cumulative running
time arrival
Outputs ON signal when the inverter's cumulative
running time F6.07 exceeds the set time by F7.21.
13 Frequency being limited
Outputs ON signal when the rated frequency exceeds the
upper limit frequency or the lower limit frequency, and
the output frequency of inverter also reaches the upper
limit frequency or the lower limit frequency.
14 Torque being limited Outputs ON signal when the output torque reaches the torque limit value and the inverter is in the stall protection
status under inverter speed control mode
15 Ready for operation
Outputs ON signal when the power supply of the inverter main circuit and control circuit has stabilized, and the
inverter has not any fault information and is in the
runnable status.
16 AI1> AI2 Outputs ON signal when the value of analog input AI1 is greater than the AI2 input value,
17 Upper limit frequency
arrival
Outputs ON signal when the operating frequency reaches
the upper limit frequency,
18
Lower limit frequency
arrival(shutdown
without output)
Outputs ON signal when the operating frequency reaches
the lower limit frequency Outputs OFF signal when the
inverter is in the state of stop
19 Undervoltage status output
Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in the undervoltage condition
20 Communication setting Please refer to communication protocol.
21 Reserved Reserved
22 Reserved Reserved
23 Zero speed running 2
(shutdown with output)
Outputs ON signal when the inverter output frequency is
0. Outputs ON signal too when the inverter is in the state
Chapter 5 Function parameter
84
of stop
24 Accumulated power-on time arrival
Outputs ON signal when the inverter's accumulated power-on time(F6.08) exceeds the set time by F7.20.
25 Frequency level
detection FDT2 output
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.26,
F7.27
26 Frequency 1 reaches output value
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.28, F7.29
27 Frequency 2 reaches
output value
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.30,
F7.31
28 Current 1 reaches output value
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.36., F7.37
29 Current 2 reaches
output value
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.38,
F7.39
30 Timer reaches output
value
Outputs ON signal when timer(F7.42)is active and after
the inverter's current running time reaches the set time.
31 AI1 input exceed limit
Outputs ON signal when the analog input AI1 value is
greater than F7.51 (AI1 input protection upper limit) or less than F7.50 (AI1 input protection limit)
32 Load droping Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in the load drop
status.
33 Reverse running Outputs ON signal when the inverter is in the reverse running status.
34 Zero current status Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.32,
F7.33
35 Module temperature arrival
Outputs ON signal when the inverter module radiator temperature(F6.06)reaches the set temperature(F7.40).
36 Software current
overrun
Please refer to the instructions of function code F7.34,
F7.35
37 Lower limit frequency
arrival(stop with output)
Outputs ON signal when the operating frequency reaches the lower limit frequency Outputs ON signal too when the
inverter is in the sate of stop
38 Alarm output When the inverter occurs failure and continues to run, the
inverter alarms output.
39 Motor overtemperature pre-warning 3
When the motor temperature reaches F8.35 (motor
overheat pre-alarm threshold), the output ON signal.
(Motor temperature by d0.41 view)
40 Current running time arrival
Outputs ON signal when the inverter's current running time exceeds the set time by F7.45.
F2.06 High-speed pulse output function selection 0 to 17 0 ☆
F2.07 DA1 output function selection 0 to 17 2 ☆
F2.08 DA2 output function selection 0 to 17 13 ☆
High-speed pulse output frequency range is 0.01kHz to F2.09 (maximum frequency of high-
speed pulse output), F2.09 can be set between 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz. Analog output DA1 and DA2 output range is 0V to 10V, or 0mA to 20mA. The range of
pulse output or analog output and the corresponding calibration relation are shown in the
following table:
Set value
Function Description
0 Running frequency 0 to maximum output frequency
1 Set frequency 0 to maximum output frequency
2 Output current 0 to 2 times rated motor current
3 Output torque 0 to 2 times rated motor torque
Chapter 5 Function parameter
85
4 Output power 0 to 2 times rated power
5 Output voltage 0 to 1.2 times rated inverter voltage
6 High-speed pulse input 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz
7 AI1 0V to 10V
8 AI2 0V to 10V (or 0 to 20mA)
9 Reserved
10 Length 0 to maximum set length
11 Count value 0 to maximum count value
12 Communication setting 0.0% to 100.0%
13 Motor speed 0 to speed with maximum output frequency
14 Output current 0.0A to 100.0A (inverter power ≦ 55kW); 0.0A
to 1000.0A (inverter power> 55kW)
15 DC bus voltage 0.0V to 1000.0V
16 Reserved
17 Frequency source main set 0~max output frequency
F2.09 Maximum output frequency
of high-speed pulse 0.01kHz to 100.00kHz
50.00k
Hz ☆
SPB terminal is selected as pulse output, the function code is used to select the maximum
value of output pulse.
F2.10 SPB switching quantity
output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F2.11 Relay 1 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F2.12 Expansion DO output delay
time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F2.13 SPA output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
F2.14 Relay 2 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
Set the delay time from occurrence to Actual output for output terminal SPA, SPB, relay 1, relay
2 and expansion DO.
F2.15 DO output terminal active status selection
Units digit
SPB switching quantity active status selection
00000 ☆
Positive logic 0
Anti-logic 1
Tens
digit
Relay 1 terminal active status setting (0 to 1, as
above)
Hundreds
digit
Expansion D0 terminal active status setting (0 to
1, as above)
Thous
ands digit
SPA terminal active status
setting (0 to 1, as above)
Ten
thousands digit
Relay 2 terminal active
status setting (0 to 1, as above)
To define the output logic for output terminal SPA, SPB, relay 1, relay 2 and expansion
DO .0: positive logic:It is active status when the digital output terminal is connected with the
corresponding common terminal, inactive when disconnected; 1: anti-logic:It is inactive status
when the digital output terminal is connected with the corresponding common terminal, active when disconnected;
F2.16 DA1 zero bias coefficient -100.0% to +100.0% 0.0% ☆
F2.17 DA1 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1.00 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
86
F2.18 DA2 zero bias coefficient -100.0% to +100.0% 0.00% ☆
F2.19 DA2 gain -10.00 to +10.00 1.00 ☆
The above function codes are generally used for correcting the zero drift of analog output
and the deviation of output amplitude. It also be used to custom analog output curve. The calculation formula in the case of DA1:
Y1 said DA1 minimum output voltage or current value; Y2 DA1 maximum output voltage
or current value Y1=10V or 20mA*F2.16*100%;
Y2=10V or 20mA* (F2.16+F2.17);
The default value of F2.16=0.0%, F2.17=1, so the output of 0 ~ 10V (0 ~ 20mA) corresponding to the minimum value of the physical quantity to characterize the maximum
amount of physical characterization.
For example, 1: The output from 0 to 20mA is changed from 4 to 20mA
Minimum input current value: y1=20mA*F2.16*100%,
4=20*F2.16, according to the formula calculation F2.16=20%; Maximum input current value by the formula: y2=20mA* (F2.16+F2.17);
20=20* (20%+F2.17), according to the formula calculation F2.17=0.8
For example 2: The output will be 0 ~ 10V to 0 ~ 5V
The formula of the minimum input voltage value: y1=10*F2.16*100%,
0=10*F2.16, F2.16=0.0% was calculated according to the formula; The formula of the maximum input voltage value: y2=10* (F2.16+F2.17);
5=10* (0+F2.17), F2.17=0.5 was calculated according to the formula.
5-2-5.Start and stop control: F3.00-F3.15
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F3.00 Start-up mode
Direct startup 0
0 ☆ Speed tracking restart 1
Pre-excitation start (AC
asynchronous motor) 2
0: Directly startup If the start DC braking time is set to 0, the inverter starts running from the start frequency. If
the start DC braking time is not set to 0, the inverter firstly performs DC braking and then starts running from the start frequency. Applicable for the small inertia load and the application that the
motor may rotate when starting.
1: Speed tracking restart The inverter firstly judges the speed and direction of motor, and then starts at the tracked
motor frequency, smoothly starts the rotating motor without shocks. Applicable for the
momentary power cut and restart with high inertia loads. To ensure the performance of Speed
Tracking Restart, it is required to accurately set the parameters of motor b0 group.
2: Asynchronous motor pre-excitation start
It is valid only for asynchronous motors, used to firstly create magnetic field before the motor running. Please refer to the instructions of function code F3.05, F3.06 for pre-excitation
current and pre-excitation time
If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, the inverter will cancel the pre-excitation process, and starts from the start frequency. If the pre-excitation time is not set to 0, the inverter will firstly
perform pre-excitation process and then starts so as to improve the dynamic response
performance of motor.
F3.01 Speed tracking mode
Start from stop frequency
0 - ★
Start from zero speed 1
Chapter 5 Function parameter
87
Start from maximum
frequency 2
Rotate speed tracking
method3 3
Software version C3.00 and above the default factory value is 3, the following version of the default value is 0 C3.00
For the shortest time to complete the process of speed tracking, select the speed mode for
inverter tracking motor : 0: track downward from the frequency that power outage happens
Usually select this mode.
1: track upward from 0 frequency For the case that power outage is for longer time and then restarts.
2: track downward from maximum frequency
For the general power generation load.
3:Rotate speed tracking method3
Automatically detect trace the speed of the machine,no impact on the implementation of
rotation of motor smooth start.
“Superscript3 ”means software version of C3.00 and above with MCU keyboard have such
function.
F3.02 Speed tracking value 1 to 100 20 ☆
When performing speed tracking restart, select speed tracking value.
Soft track: The larger the parameter value, the faster tracking. But if the value is set to too large, which
may cause tracking unreliable.
Hard track: The smaller the parameter value, the faster tracking. But if the value is set to too small,
which may cause tracking unreliable.
F3.03 Start frequency 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
F3.04 Hold time for start frequency 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★
When the inverter starts, firstly run at the start frequency, the running time is the hold time
for start frequency, afterwards run at the frequency reference. The start frequency F3.03 is not limited by the lower limit frequency. But if the set target
frequency is less than the start frequency, the inverter does not start and keeps in the standby
state. The hold time for start frequency is inactive when switching between forward rotation and
reverse rotation The hold time for start frequency is not included in the acceleration time, but the
simple PLC run-time. Example 1:
F0.03=0 the frequency source is set to digital reference
F0.01=2.00Hz the digital set frequency is 2.00Hz
F3.03=5.00Hz the start frequency is 5.00Hz
F3.04=2.0s the hold time for start frequency is 2.0s, at this time, the inverter will be in
the standby state with the output frequency of 0.00Hz.
Example 2:
F0.03=0 the frequency source is set to digital reference
F0.01=10.00Hz the digital set frequency is 10.00Hz
F3.03=5.00Hz the start frequency is 5.00Hz
F3.04=2.0s the hold time for start frequency is 2.0s
At this point, the inverter accelerates to 5.00Hz for 2.0s, and then accelerates to the
reference frequency of 10.00Hz.
F3.05 Start DC braking current/pre-
excitation current 0% to 100% 0% ★
F3.06 Start DC braking time/pre-
excitation time 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
88
Start DC braking, generally is used to stop and then restart the motor. Pre-excitation is used
to create magnetic field for asynchronous motor and then start the motor to improve the response
speed.
Start DC braking is only active when the start mode is the direct startup. The inverter firstly performs DC braking at the set start DC braking current, after the start DC braking time is passed,
and then start running. If the DC braking time is set to 0, the inverter will directly start and
neglect DC braking. The larger DC braking current, the greater braking force. If the startup mode is the asynchronous motor pre-excitation start, the inverter firstly creates
magnetic field at the preset pre-excitation current, after the set pre-excitation time is passed and
then start running. If the pre-excitation time is set to 0, the inverter will directly start and neglect pre-excitation.
Start DC braking current/pre-excitation current is the percentage of inverter rater current.
F3.07 Stop mode Deceleration parking 0
0 ☆ Free stop 1
When the inverter receives the "stop" command, the inverter will set up the motor stop mode
according to the parameter.
0: Deceleration parking mode The inverter will decelerates to the lowest frequency until stop according to the set deceleration
time and mode.
1: Free stop mode When the inverter receives the "stop" command, it immediately stops output and the motor
freely run until stop under the action of inertia.
F3.08 Initial frequency of stop DC braking
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency)
0.00Hz ☆
F3.09 Waiting time of stop DC
braking 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆
F3.10 Stop DC braking current 0% to 100% 0% ☆
F3.11 Stop DC braking time 0.0s to 100.0s 0.0s ☆
Initial frequency of stop DC braking: if the operating frequency is reduced to the initial
frequency when decelerating, DC braking process is started. Waiting time of stop DC braking: if the operating frequency is reduced to the said initial
frequency, the inverter firstly stops output for some time, and then DC braking process is started.
In order to prevent overcurrent fault that DC braking may cause at the higher speeds. Stop DC braking current: it indicates the percentage of the DC braking output current in the
rated motor current. The larger this value, the stronger the DC braking effect, but the greater the
heat of the motor and the inverter. Stop DC braking time: If this value is 0, DC braking process is canceled. Please see the
schematic diagram for the DC braking process.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
89
Time t
Effective value
of output voltage
Time t
Stop DC braking time(t2)
Waiting time of stop DC
braking(t1)
Stop DC brakingamount
Output
frequency(Hz)
Initial
frequency ofstop DC
braking
Running command
Figure 5-9 The schematic diagram for the DC braking process.
F3.12 Dynamic braking utilization
rate 0% to 100% 100% ☆
Effective only for the inverter with built-in braking unit.
Due to the duty cycle of braking unit is adjusted, if the braking use rate is high, the duty
cycle of braking unit is high, the braking effect is stronger, but the inverter's bus voltage fluctuation is larger during the braking process .
F3.13 Ac/deceleration mode
Linear acceleration and
deceleration 0
0 ★ S curve acceleration and deceleration A
1
S curve acceleration and
deceleration B 2
Select the frequency change mode in the process of start/stop. 0: Linear acceleration and deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases linearly. PI9000 provides four kinds of
acceleration and deceleration time. You can select by the multi-function digital input terminals (F1.00 to F1.08).
1: S curve acceleration and deceleration A
The output frequency increases or decreases at the S curve. S-curve is used for the occasion that requires to gently start or stop, such as elevators, conveyor belts, etc.. The function code
F3.14 and F3.15 respectively defined the proportion of S curve start-section and the proportion of
S curve end-section
2: S curve acceleration and deceleration B
In the mode of S curve acceleration and deceleration B, the motor rated frequency fb is
always the inflection point of S curve. Usually used for the occasion of high-speed regional above the rated frequency that requires rapid acceleration and deceleration.
F3.14 Proportion of S curve start-
section 0.0% to (100.0% to F3.15) 30.0% ★
F3.15 Proportion of S curve end-section
0.0% to (100.0% to F3.14) 30.0% ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
90
Set frequency (f)
Time t
Output frequency (Hz)
t1 t2t2 t1
Figure 5-10 Schematic diagram of S curve ac/deceleration A
Set frequency (f)
Time t
Output frequency (Hz)
T T
Set frequency (fb)
Figure 5-11 Schematic diagram of S curve ac/deceleration B
The function code F3.14 and F3.15 respectively defined the proportion of start-section and
the proportion of end-section for S curve acceleration and deceleration A,the two function code
must meet: F3.14 + F3.15 ≤ 100.0%.
In the Figure of the S-curve acceleration and deceleration A, t1 is the time parameter defined by F3.14, the slope of the output frequency variation during this period is gradually increasing. t2
is the time parameter defined by F3.15, the slope of the output frequency variation during the period is gradually changed to 0. Within the time between t1 and t2, the slope of the output
frequency variation is fixed, i.e. the linear acceleration and deceleration is achieved in this
interval.
5-2-6.V/F control parameters: F4.00-F4.14 This group of function code is only valid to V/F control, invalid to vector control.
V/F control is suitable for fans, pumps and other universal loads, or one inverter with multiple
motors, or for the applications that inverter power is significantly different from the motor power.
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F4.00 V/F curve setting
Linear V/F 0
0 ★
Multi-point V/F 1
Square V/F 2
1.2th power V/F 3
1.4th power V/F 4
1.6th power V/F 6
1.8th power V/F 8
Reserved 9
V/F completely separate 10
V/F half separate 11
0: linear V/F
Suitable for ordinary constant torque load.
1: multi-point V/F Suitable for dehydrator, centrifuge and other special loads any V/F relationship curves can be
obtained by setting parameters F4.03 to F4.08.
2: square V/F
Chapter 5 Function parameter
91
Suitable for fans, pumps and centrifugal loads.
3 to 8: V/F relationship curve between linear V/F and square V/F.
10:VF separate completely mode. In this mode, the output frequency and output voltage is
separated completely, no any relationship at all, the output frequency controlled by frequency source setting , but output voltage determined by F4.12 setting.(V/F separate voltage supply
source )
V/F separated completely mode can suitable for in inductive heating, inverter power supply, torque motor, etc applications.
11: V/F semi-separate mode.
V is proportional to F in this mode, but the proportional relationship can be set by F4.12 parameters, furthermore, the V and F proportion also relate to rated voltage of motor and rated
frequency in b0 group.
Assume that input voltage source is X ( X value range from 0~100%), the output voltage V and output frequency F proportion relationship can be defined as : V/F=2*X*(rated voltage of
motor)/(rated frequency of motor)
F4.01 Torque boost 0.0%: automatic torque boost
0.1% to 30.0% 0.0% ★
F4.02 Torque boost cut-off
frequency
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency)
15.00H
z ★
Torque boost is mainly used to improve the characteristics of the torque low-frequency under
V/F control mode. If the torque boost is too low, the motor will work at the lower speed and power. If the torque boost is too high, the motor will run with overexcitation, the inverter's output current
increases and the efficiency is reduced.
It is recommended to increase this parameter when the motor works with heavy load but without enough torque. The torque boost can be reduced when the load is lighter. When the torque
boost is set to 0.0, the inverter will automatically perform torque boost, the inverter can automatically calculates the required torque boost value according to the motor stator resistance
parameters.
Torque boost cutoff frequency: torque boost is valid below this frequency, invalid above the
set frequency.
V1
Output frequency
f1
Vb
Output voltage
fbV1:Manual torque voltage Vb:Maximum output voltage
f1:Manual torque boost cut-off frequency
fb:Rated operating frequency
Figure 5-12 Schematic diagram of manual torque boost voltage
F4.03 Multi-point V/F frequency point F1 0.00Hz to F4.05 0.00Hz ★
F4.04 Multi-point V/F voltage point V1 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
F4.05 Multi-point V/F frequency point F2 F4.03 to F4.07 0.00Hz ★
F4.06 Multi-point V/F voltage point V2 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
F4.07 Multi-point V/F frequency point F3 F4.05 to b0.04(rated
motor frequency) 0.00Hz ★
F4.08 Multi-point V/F voltage point V3 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ★
F4.03 to F4.08 six parameters are used to define multi-point V/F curve. The multi-point V/F curve is set according to the load characteristics of motor, please be noted
that the relationship between three voltage points and three frequency points must be meet: V1 <V2
<V3, F1 <F2 <F3. The setting of multi-point V/F curve is as shown in below figure.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
92
In the sate of low frequency, if the voltage is set to a higher value, which may cause motor
overheating even burned, the inverter may appear overcurrent stall or overcurrent protection.
V1
Frequency
F1
Vb
Voltage%
Fb
V1-V3:Voltage percentage of stage 1-3 to multi-speed V/F
F1-F3:Frequency percentage of stage 1-3 to multi-speed V/F
Vb:Rated motor voltage Fb:Rated motor operating frequency
V3
V2
F2 F3
Figure 5-13 Schematic diagram of multi-point V/F curve setting
F4.09 V/F slip compensation gain 0% to 200.0% 0.0% ☆
This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors. V/F slip compensation can compensate for the speed deviation of asynchronous motor when
the load increases, so as to keep stable speed when the load changes.
If V/F slip compensation gain is set to 100.0%, it means that the compensated deviation is equal to the rated motor slip under the rated motor load mode, while the rated motor slip can be
calculated through b0 group of motor rated frequency and rated speed.
When adjusting V/F slip compensation gain, generally it is based on the principle that the motor speed is same as the target speed. When the motor speed is different from target value, it is
necessary to appropriately fine-tune the gain.
F4.10 V/F overexcitation gain 0 to 200 64 ☆
In the process of the inverter's deceleration, the over-excitation control can suppress the rise of
bus voltage to avoid overvoltage fault. The greater overexcitation gain, the stronger the inhibitory
effect. For the occasions that the inverter's deceleration easily cause over pressure alarm , the
overexcitation gain needs to be improved. But if overexcitation gain is too large, which easily lead
to the increase of output current, you need to weigh in practical applications. For the small inertia occasions that the inverter's deceleration will not cause voltage rise, it is
recommended to set overexcitation gain as 0; the set value is also suitable for the occasions with
braking resistor.
F4.11 V/F oscillation suppression gain 0 to 100 0 ☆
The method of selecting gain is take the value as smaller as possible with the premise that
effectively suppressing oscillation, in order to avoid the adverse affect caused by V/F running. Please select 0 as the gain when the motor has not oscillation phenomenon. Only increase gain
value when the motor has obvious oscillation, the greater gain, the more obvious the suppression of
oscillation. When using the function of oscillation suppression, which requires that the motor's rated
current and no-load current parameters must be accurate, otherwise V/F oscillation suppression is
ineffective.
F4.12 V/F separation voltage source
Digital setting(F4.13) 0
0 ☆
Analog setting AI1 1
Analog setting AI2 2
Panel potentiometer 3
High-speed pulse setting(DI5) 4
Multistage instruction setting 5
Simple PLC 6
PID 7
Communications given 8
Chapter 5 Function parameter
93
Analog setting AI3 9
100.0% Corresponding to the motor rated voltage(b0.02)
F4.13 V/F separation
voltage digital setting 0V to rated motor voltage 0V ☆
F4.14 V/F separation
voltage rise time 0.0s to 1000.0s 0.0s ☆
5-2-7.Vector control parameters: F5.00-F5.15 F5 function code is only valid to vector control, invalid to V/F control
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F5.00 Proportion of speed loop G1 1~100 30 ☆
F5.01 Speed loop integral T1 0.01s~10.00s 0.50s ☆
F5.02 Switching frequency 1 0.00~F5.05 5.00Hz ☆
F5.03 Proportion of speed loop G2 1~100 20 ☆
F5.04 Speed loop integral T2 0.01s~10.00s 1.00s ☆
F5.05 Switching frequency 2 F5.02~F0.19(max frequency) 10.00Hz ☆
PI parameter
F5.01
F5.04F5.03
F5.00
F5.02 F5.05
Frequency of instruction
Figure 5-14 PI parameter diagram
Converter working in different frequency can choose different speed ring PI parameters.
Operating frequency is less than the switching frequency 1 (F5.02), speed ring PI control parameters for F5.00 and F5.01. Operating frequency is bigger than the switching frequency 2
(F5.05), speed in PI control parameters for F5.03 and F5.04. The speed ring PI parameters of
switching frequency 1 and switching frequency 2 are for the two groups of PI parameter linear switching, as shown in figure:
By setting speed regulator proportion coefficient and the integral time, can adjust the speed of
the vector control dynamic response characteristics. Gain take large, quick response, but too large will produce oscillation; Gain take hours,
response lag.
Integral time is too large, slow response, external interference control variation will worse;If
integral time short, reaction quickly,too small happen oscillation.
Set this value to considering the control stability and response speed, if the factory parameters
can't meet the requirements, adjust parameter based on the factory, first increase proportion to ensure the system is not oscillation; Then reduced integration time, make the system has faster
response, small overshoot.
Note: if the PI parameters Settings unsuitable, may cause excessive speed overshoot. Even in overshoot back occurs when overvoltage fault.
F5.06 Speed loop integral valid 0
0 ☆ invalid 1
F5.07 Torque limit source under
speed control mode
Function code F5.08 setting 0
0 ☆ Analog setting AI1 1 Analog setting AI2 2
Chapter 5 Function parameter
94
Panel potentiometer setting 3
High-speed pulse setting 4 Communication setting 5 Min(AI1, AI2) 6 Max(AI1, AI2) 7
Analog setting AI3 8
F5.08 Limit digital setting 0.0% to 200.0% 150.0% ☆
In speed control mode, the maximum value of inverter output torque is controlled by the
torque upper limit source.
F5.07 is used to select the setting source of torque limit, when it is set by analog, high-speed pulse or communication, the set 100% corresponds to F5.08, the 100% of F5.08 is the inverter's
rated torque.
F5.09 Vector control differential
gain 50% to 200% 150% ☆
For the sensorless vector control, the parameter can be used to adjust the motor speed and
stability: if the speed of motor with load is low, increases the parameter and vice versa decreases.
F5.10 Speed loop filter time 0.000s to 0.100s 0.000s ☆
Under vector control mode, properly increases the filter time when speed fluctuate wildly; but
do not excessively increases, or the lag effect will cause shock.
F5.11 Vector control overexcitation gain 0 to 200 64 ☆
In the process of the inverter's deceleration, the over-excitation control can suppress the
increase of bus voltage to avoid overvoltage fault. The greater overexcitation, the stronger the
inhibitory effect. For the occasions that the inverter's deceleration easily cause over pressure alarm , the
overexcitation gain needs to be improved. But if overexcitation gain is too large, which easily lead
to the increase of output current, you need to weigh in practical applications. For the small inertia occasions that the inverter's deceleration will not cause voltage rise, it is
recommended to set overexcitation gain as 0; the set value is also suitable for the occasions with
braking resistor.
F5.12 Excitation regulator proportional gain 0 to 60000 2000 ☆
F5.13 Excitation regulator integral gain 0 to 60000 1300 ☆
F5.14 Torque regulator proportional gain 0 to 60000 2000 ☆
F5.15 Torque regulator integral gain 0 to 60000 1300 ☆
The regulator parameters of vector control current loop PI, the parameter will be obtained
automatically after performing asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning or synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning and generally do not need to modify it.
Note:the dimension that this current loop integral gain adopted is not the integration time, but
the direct set integral gain. Therefore, if the setting of current loop PI gain is too large, which may cause the oscillation of entire control loop, in the event of oscillation, you can manually
reduce PI proportional gain and integral gain.
5-2-8.Keyboard and display: F6.00-F6.19
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
F6.00 STOP/RESET key
functions
STOP/RESET key is enabled only
in keyboard operation mode 0
1 ☆ STOP/RESET key is enabled
under any operation mode 1
F6.01 Running status display
parameters 1 0000 to FFFF 001F ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
95
0123456789101112131415
DI Input status
Output torque
Output power
Output current
(Hz)
Bus voltage (V)
Set frequency
Running frequency
Output voltage
DO Output
AI1 Voltage
AI2 Voltage
(Hz)
Count
AI3 Voltage (V)
Length
Load speed
PID Setting
(A)
(kW)
(%)
(V)
(V)
(V)
Figure 5-15 Running status display parameters 1
If the above parameters need to be displayed in operation, firstly set its position to 1, and
then set at F6.01 after converting the binary number to the hexadecimal number.
F6.01-F6.03 data transfer approach example
Select monitor loading speed, set F6.01 No 14=1; Select monitor AI1 voltage, set F6.01 No 9=1, the rest be deduced by analogy. Hypothesis according to the requirement to all relative
position is set to 1 after get the following data
No. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Value 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
Put 4 numbers with a set, Then data is divided into four groups as below
No. 15-12 11-8 7-4 3-0
Value 0111 1010 0100 1111
Then according to the data in the table below (binary hex value table) check out the results
ox7A4F
binary hex binary hex binary hex binary hex
0000 0 0100 4 1000 8 1100 C
0001 1 0101 5 1001 9 1101 D
0010 2 0110 6 1010 A 1110 E
0011 3 0111 7 1011 B 1111 F
Note:The transforming relationship of F6.02 and F6.03 is the same of F6.01.
F6.02 Running status display
parameters 2 0x0000 to 0xFFFF 0000 ☆
0123456789101112131415
Present charge time
Line speed
Rest time of running
Running frequency2 (Hz)
High speed pulse input
frequency
(kHz)
PLC range
PID feedback
(Min)
Present running time (Min)
High speed pulse input
frequency (Hz)
Communication parameters
Encoder feedback speed (Hz)
Assistance frequency B
display(Hz)
Main frequency A
display (Hz)
Ordering torque
Remain
Synchronous machine
wheel position
Figure 5-16 Running status display parameters 2
If the above parameters need to be displayed in operation, firstly set its position to 1, and
Chapter 5 Function parameter
96
then set at F6.02 after converting the binary number to the hexadecimal number.
Running status display parameters, which is used to set the parameters that can be viewed
when the inverter is in operation.
There are 32 parameters available for viewing, select desired status parameters according to F6.01, F6.02 binary parameter values, the display order starts from the lowest level of F6.01.
F6.03 Stop status display
parameters 0x0001 to 0xFFFF 0033 ☆
0123456789101112131415
DI input situation
Bus voltage (V)
Setting frequency
DO output situation
AI1 voltage
AI2 voltage
(Hz)
Count value
AI3 voltage (V)
Length
Load speed
PID setting
(V)
(V)
PLC range
High speed pulseinput frequency(Hz)Remain
Remain
Remain
Figure 5-16 Stop status display parameters
If the above parameters need to be displayed on operation, firstly set its position to 1, and
then set at F6.03 after converting the binary number to the hexadecimal number.
F6.04 Load speed display coefficient
0.0001 to 6.5000 3.0000 ☆
When load speed needs to be displayed, adjust the inverter's output frequency and load speed by
using the parameter.
F6.05 Decimal places for load speed
display
0 decimal place 0
1 ☆ 1 decimal place 1
2 decimal places 2
3 decimal places 3 Decimal places for load speed display The below example illustrates the calculation of load
speed:
If the load speed coefficient(F6.04) is 2.000, the number of decimal places of load speed(F6.05) is 2 (two decimal places), when the inverter operating frequency reaches 40.00Hz,
the load speed is : 40.00 * 2.000 = 80.00 (2 decimal places display)
If the inverter is shutdown, the load speed displays the speed relative to the set frequency, that is the "set load speed". If the set frequency is 50.00Hz, the load speed under the state of
shutdown: 50.00 * 2.000 = 100.00 (2 decimal places display)
F6.06 Inverter module radiator
temperature 0.0℃ to 100.0℃ - ●
Display the inverter module IGBT temperature
The different models of the inverter module vary IGBT overtemperature protection values.
F6.07 Total run time 0h to 65535h - ●
Display the total run time of inverter When the run time reaches the set time(F7.21), the
inverter's multi-function digital output function (12) outputs ON signal.
F6.08 Total power-on time 0 to 65535 h - ●
F6.09 Total power consumption 0 to 65535 kwh - ●
Display the total power consumption of inverter to date until now
Chapter 5 Function parameter
97
F6.10 Part number Inverter product number - ●
F6.11 Software version number Control panel software version
number - ●
F6.12 to F6.14 Reserved
F6.15 Keyboard type selection 0:keypad (single row LED)
1:big keyboard (double row LED) 0 ●
F6.16 Monitor selection 2
1Kbit/100bit 10bit/1bit
d0.04 ☆ parameter number
parameter series number
The parameter of motor selection2 can be showed in the bottom of double LED or LCD.
F6.17 Power correction coefficient 0.00~10.00 1.00 ☆
Frequency converter with motor running, the display output power(d0.05)is different with the
actual output power, through the parameters, adjust the converter display power and the actual
output power corresponding relation.
F6.18 Multifunction key definition
13
UP key is defined as add function key 0
0 ☆
UP key is defined free stop 1
UP key is defined Forward running 2
UP key is defined Reverse running 3
UP key is defined Forward Jog running 4
UP key is defined Reverse Jog running 5
UP key is defined UP function key 6
UP key is defined DOWN function key 7
F6.19 Multifunction key definition
23
DOWN key is defined as subtract
function key 0
0 ☆
Key is defined free stop 1
DOWN key is defined Forward running 2
DOWN key is defined Reverse running 3
DOWN key is defined Forward Jog
running 4
DOWN key is defined Reverse Jog running
5
DOWN key is defined UP function key 6
DOWN key is defined DOWN function
key 7
Define the function keys of the user-defined keys 0: The multifunction key define 1 as the add function key.
In the monitor menu, the add function key proceed the add modify of the keyboard setting
frequency through F0.01 . In the parameter selection menu, The add function keys adjust the parameter selection
In the parameter modify menu, the add function keys adjust the parameter value.
The multifunction key define 2 as the subtract function key. Under the monitor menu , the subtract function keys proceed the subtract modify of the
keyboard setting frequency through F0.01 .
Under the parameter selection menu, The subtract function keysadjust the parameter selection Under the parameter modify menu, the subtract function keys adjust the parameter value.
Multifunction key is defined free stop key. The key is effective under Parameter selection monitor menu, the inverter is free stop. After
free stop , no startup command , after 1S, it is allowed restart .
2:Multifunction key is defined as FWD Forward funning key. Under monitor menu, the key is effective under Parameter selection menu, the inverter is
forward running.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
98
3:Multifunction key is defined as FEV reverse running function key.
The key is effective under Parameter selection monitor menu, the inverter is forward running.
4: Multifunction key is defined as Forward Jog running key.
The key is effective under Parameter selection monitor menu, the inverter is forward jog running.
5: Multifunction key is defined as Reverse Jog running key.
The key is effective under Parameter selection monitor menu, the inverter is reverse jog running.
6: Multifunction key is defined as UP function key.
The key is effective at any time, the control way is same as terminal control UP.
7:Multifunction key is defined as DOWN function key.
The key is effective at any time , the control way is same as terminal control UP.
Note: “Superscript 3”Means software version is above C3.00 with MCU keyboard has the function.
5-2-9.Auxiliary function: F7.00-F7.54
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
F7.00 Jog running frequency 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) 6.00Hz ☆
F7.01 Jog acceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 5.0s ☆
F7.02 Jog deceleration time 0.0s to 6500.0s 5.0s ☆
Defined the inverter's reference frequency and ac/deceleration time when jogging
In operation of Jog, the startup mode is fixed as direct startup mode (F3.00 = 0), the
shutdown mode is fixed as deceleration parking mode (F3.07 = 0).
F7.03 Jog priority Invalid 0
1 ☆ Valid 1
This parameter is used to set whether the priority of jog function is active or not..When it is set to active, if the jog command is received by inverter in operation, the inverter will change
to jog running status.
F7.04 Jump frequency 1 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
F7.05 Jump frequency 2 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
F7.06 Jump frequency range 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
When the set frequency is in the jump frequency range, the Actual operating frequency will
run at the jump frequency close from the set frequency . The inverter can avoid mechanical resonance point of load by setting jump frequency.
PI9000 can set two jump frequency points, if the two jump frequencies are set to 0, the jump
frequency function will be canceled. For the principle schematic of jump frequency and its range, please refer to the following figure.
Time(t)
Output
frequency
Jump
frequency 2
Jump
frequency 1
(Hz)
Jump frequency range
Jump frequency range
Jump frequency range
Jump frequency range
Figure 5-17 Schematic diagram of jump frequency
F7.07 Jump frequency availability during Invalid 0 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
99
ac/deceleration process Valid 1
The function code is used to set whether the jump frequency is active or not in the process of
acceleration and deceleration. If it is set to active, when the operating frequency is in the jump frequency range, the Actual
operating frequency will skip the set jump frequency boundary. The below figure below shows
the jump frequency status in the process of acceleration and deceleration.
Time(t)
Output
frequency
Jump
frequency 2
Jump
frequency 1
(Hz)
Jump frequency range
Jump frequency range
Jump frequency range
Jump frequency range
Figure 5-18 Schematic diagram of jump frequency availability
in the process of acceleration and deceleration
F7.08 Acceleration time 2 0.0s to 6500.0s - ☆
F7.09 Deceleration time 2 0.0s to 6500.0s - ☆
F7.10 Acceleration time 3 0.0s to 6500.0s - ☆
F7.11 Deceleration time 3 0.0s to 6500.0s - ☆
F7.12 Acceleration time 4 0.0s to 6500.0s - ☆
F7.13 Deceleration time 4 0.0s to 6500.0s - ☆
PI9000 provides 4 groups of deceleration time, respectively F0.13\F0.14 and the above 3 groups of deceleration time.
The 4 groups of deceleration time are defined exactly the same, please refer to the
instructions of F0.13 and F0.14. The 4 groups of deceleration time can be switched through different combinations of the multi-function digital input terminal DI, please refer to the
instructions of function code F1.00 to F1.07 in the attachment 2 for the detailed application
methods .
F7.14
Switching frequency point between
acceleration time 1 and acceleration
time 2
0.00Hz to
F0.19(maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
F7.15
Switching frequency point between deceleration time 1 and deceleration
time 2
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
The function is active when motor 1 is selected and DI terminal is not selected to switch between ac/deceleration. It is used to automatically select ac/deceleration time by not DI terminal
but the operating frequency range when the inverter is running. Output
frequency(Hz)
Set
frequency
F7.15F7.14
Acceleration
time 2Acceleration
time 1
Deceleration
time 1Deceleration
time 2
time (t)
Figure 5-19 Schematic diagram of switching between acceleration and deceleration
For the above figure in the process of acceleration, if the operating frequency is less than
F7.14, select acceleration time 1; otherwise select acceleration time 2.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
100
For the above figure in the process of deceleration, if the operating frequency is more than
F7.15, select deceleration time 1; otherwise select deceleration time 2.
F7.16 Forward/reverse
rotation deadband 0.00s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
It is the waiting time that the inverter reaches zero speed when the parameter is used to switch between forward and reverse rotation.
Output
frequency (Hz)
Time t
Forward
Deadband
Reversal Figure 5-20 Schematic diagram of switching between acceleration and deceleration
F7.17 Reverse rotation control Allow 0
0 ☆ Prohibit 1
For certain production equipments, the reverse rotation may result in damage to the
equipment, the function can disable the reverse rotation. The factory default allows reverse rotation.
F7.18
Set frequency lower than lower limit
frequency mode
Running at lower limit frequency 0
0 ☆ Stop 1
Zero speed running 2 When the set frequency is lower than the lower limit frequency, the inverter operating status
can be selected through the parameter. PI9000 provides three modes of operation to meet the
needs of a variety of applications.
F7.19 Droop control 0.00Hz to 10.00Hz 0.00Hz ☆
This function is generally used for the load distribution that several motors drag the same one load.
The droop control means that the inverter output frequency is decreased as the load is
increased, so that when several motors drag(work for)the same one load, each motor's output frequency much drops, which can reduce the load of the motor to balance evenly multiple motors'
load .
This parameter means the decreased value of output frequency when the inverter outputs the rated load.
F7.20 Setting cumulative
power-on arrival time 0h to 36000h 0h ☆
When the total power-on time(F6.08) reaches the time set by F7.20, the inverter
multifunction digital DO outputs ON signal.
F7.21 Setting cumulative
running arrival time 0h to 36000h 0h ☆
Used to set the running time of inverter. When the total power-on time(F6.07) reaches the set timeF7.21, the inverter multifunction
digital DO outputs ON signal.
F7.22 Start protection OFF 0 0 ☆
ON 1 This parameter is related to the security protection of the inverter.
If this parameteris set to 1, if the time run command is effective when power on (for
example, the terminal run command is closed before power on), the drive does not respond to
Chapter 5 Function parameter
101
the run command, you must firstly cancel the run command , after run command is again
effective the drive response. Prevent the danger occurs when power on or fault reset, motor
repose to the run command unknowingly.
If this parameter is set to 0, the inverter power off without a fault condition (for example, the terminal run command is closed before power on), the drive response to run commands.
F7.23 Frequency detection value (FDT1) 0.00Hz to F0.19(maximum frequency)
50.00H
z ☆
F7.24 Frequency detection hysteresis value (FDT1) 0.0% to 100.0% (FDT1 level) 5.0% ☆
The inverter's multifunction output DO will output ON signal when the operating frequency
is higher than the detected value, conversely DO output ON signal is canceled.
The above parameters is used to set the detected value of output frequency, and the hysteresis value after the output is canceled. Of which, F7.24 is the percentage of the hysteresis
frequency in the detected value(F7.23). The below figure is the schematic diagram of FDT.
FDT level
Time t
FDT hysteresis value=F7.23*F7.24
Output
frequency (Hz)
ON
Time t
Frequencyarrivaldetection signal
(DO,relay)
Figure 5-21 Schematic diagram of FDT level
F7.25 Frequency reaches detection width
0.00 to 100% maximum frequency 0.0% ☆
Set
frequency
Time t
Detection
amplitude
Output
frequency (Hz)
Time t
Frequency
reaches
detection signal ONON
Figure 5-22 Schematic diagram of frequency arrival detection amplitude
The inverter's multifunction output DO will output ON signal when the inverter's operating
frequency is in a certain range of target frequency
This parameter is used to set the frequency arrival detection range, the parameter is the percentage of maximum frequency. The above figure is the schematic diagram of frequency
arrival.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
102
F7.26 Frequency detection value (FDT2) 0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum
frequency) 50.00H
z ☆
F7.27 Frequency detection hysteresis value
(FDT2)
0.0% to 100.0% (FDT2
level) 5.0% ☆
The frequency detection function is same as FDT1 exactly, please refer to the instructions of FDT1 or function codes F7.23, F7.24.
F7.28 Random arrivals frequency detection value 1
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency)
50.00H
z ☆
F7.29 Random arrivals frequency detection width 1
0.00% to 100.0% (maximum frequency) 0.0% ☆
F7.30 Random arrivals frequency detection value 2
0.00Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency)
50.00H
z ☆
F7.31 Random arrivals frequency detection width 2
0.00% to 100.0% (maximum frequency) 0.0% ☆
Random arrivals
frequency
Time t
Frequency detection range
Output
frequency(Hz)
ONOFF
ONOFF
Random arrivals
frequency
detection signal
DO or relay
OFF
Frequency detection range
Figure 5-23 Schematic diagram of random arrivals frequency detection
When the inverter's output frequency randomly reaches the range of the detected
value(positive or negative), the multi-function DO will output ON signal.
PI9000 provides two groups of parameter to set frequency value and frequency detection range. The above figure is the schematic diagram of the function.
F7.32 Zero current detection
level 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current) 5.0% ☆
F7.33 Zero current detection delay time 0.01s to 360.00s 0.10s ☆
Zero current detection
level F7.32
Time t
Outputcurrent
Zero current detection delay time F7.33
Time t
Zero current
detection signalON
Figure 5-24 Schematic diagram of zero current detection
When the inverter's output current is less than or equal to zero current detection level and
lasts for longer than the delay time of zero-current detection, the inverter's multifunction DO will
Chapter 5 Function parameter
103
output ON signal. The figure is the schematic diagram of zero current detection.
F7.34 Overrun value of output
current
0.0% (not detected) 0.1% to 300.0% (rated motor current)
200.0
% ☆
F7.35 Output Current overrun
detection delay time 0.01s to 360.00s 0.00s ☆
Overrun value of outputcurrentF7.34
Time t
Output current
Output current overrun detection delay timeF7.35
Time t
Output current
overrun detection
signalON
Figure 5-25 Schematic diagram of output current overrun detection signal
When the inverter's output current is more than or overrun the detection point and lasts for longer than the delay time of software overcurrent point detection, the inverter's multifunction
DO will output ON signal.
F7.36 Random arrivals current 1 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current) 100% ☆
F7.37 Random arrivals current 1
width 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current) 0.0% ☆
F7.38 Random arrivals current 2 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current) 100% ☆
F7.39 Random arrivals current 2
width 0.0% to 300.0% (rated motor current) 0.0% ☆
When the inverter's output current randomly reaches the range of the current detection width(positive or negative), the inverter multifunction DO will output ON signal.
PI9000 provides two group of sets of parameter for Randomly Reaches Current and
Detection Width, the figure is the functional diagram.
Random arrivalscurrent
Time t
Outputcurrent
Random arrivals
current detection
signal DO or
relay
ON
OFF
ON
OFF OFF
Random arrivals
current width
ON
Figure 5-26 Schematic diagram of random arrivals current detection
F7.40 Module temperature
arrival 0℃ to 100℃ 75℃ ☆
When the inverter radiator temperature reaches the temperature, the inverter multifunction
DO will output "Module Temperature Arrival" ON signal.
F7.41 Cooling fan control Fan running only when running 0
0 ☆ Fan always running 1
Used to select the cooling fan mode, if you select 0, the fan will run when the inverter is
Chapter 5 Function parameter
104
running, but in the stop state of inverter, if the radiator temperature is above 40 degrees, the fan
will run, otherwise the fan will not run.
If you select 1, when the fan will always running after power-on.
Note:PI9100A fan without control.
F7.42 Timing function selection
Invalid 0 0 ★ Valid 1
F7.43 Timing run time selection
F7.44 setting 0
0 ★
AI1 1
AI2 2
Panel potentiometer 3
Analog input range 100% corresponds to F7.44
F7.44 Timing run time 0.0Min to 6500.0Min 0.0Min ★
The group of parameters are used to complete the inverter timing run function. If F7.42 timing function is active, the inverter starts as the timer starts, when the set timing
run time is reached, the inverter automatically shut down, at the same time the multi-function DO
will output ON signal. Every time the inverter starts, the timer will time from 0, the remaining time can be viewed
by d0.20. The timing run time is set by F7.43, F7.44 in minute.
F7.45 Current running arrival time.
0.0Min to 6500.0Min 0.0Min ★
When current running time reaches this time, the inverter multi-function digital DO will
output"Current Running Time Arrival "ON signal.
F7.46 Awakens frequency dormancy frequency(F7.48)to maximum
frequency (F0.19) 0.00Hz ☆
F7.47 Awakens delay time 0.0s to 6500.0s 0.0s ☆
F7.48 Dormancy frequency 0.00Hz to awakens frequency(F7.46) 0.00Hz ☆
F7.49 Dormancy delay time 0.0s to 6500.0s 0.0s ☆
F7.50 AI1 input voltage
protection lower limit 0.00V to F7.51 3.10V ☆
F7.51 AI1 input voltage
protection upper limit F7.50 to 10.00V 6.80V ☆
When analog AI1 input is greater than F7.51, or when AI1 input is less than F7.50, the
inverter multi-functional DO will output "AI1 input overrun"signal, so as to indicate whether the
AI1 input voltage is within the set range or not. F7.52 to
F7.53 Reserved
F7.54 Jog mode setting 3
Bits Jog direction
002 ☆
Forward 0
Reversed 1
Determine the direction from
the main termina 2
Ten bits End running state by
Jogging
Restore to the state before
jogging 0
stop running 1
Hundred bits Acceleration/deceleration time after stop
jogging
Recover to the
acceleration/deceleration time before jogging
0
Chapter 5 Function parameter
105
Keep the
acceleration/deceleration time
when jogging
1
Note: “Superscripts3” software version for C3.00 above with MCU keyboard have this
function.
5-2-10.Fault and protection:F8.00-F8.35
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
F8.00 Overcurrent stall gain 0 to 100 20 ☆
F8.01 Overcurrent stall
protection current 100% to 200% - ☆
G machine factory default parameters of 150%, F machine factory default parameters of 130%
When the output current of converter achieves set the current stall current protection
(F8.01), inverter when accelerating or running at a constant rate, reduce output frequency; in deceleration operation, slowing the rate of decline, until the current is less than before the
current stall protection current (F8.01) and operating frequency was back to normal.
Over current stall gain, which is used to adjust the capacity of inverter to restrain over current during acceleration and deceleration. The greater the value of this value, the stronger the
ability to inhibit the flow. On the premise of no flow, the smaller the gain setting is better.
For the load with small inertia, the gain of the over current stall should be small, otherwise, the system dynamic response will be slow. For large inertia load, this value should be large,
otherwise the suppression effect is not good, there may be over current fault. When the
overcurrent stall gain is set to 0, the function of the current.
F8.02 Motor overload protection Prohibit 0
1 ☆ Allow 1
F8.03 Motor overload protection gain 0.20 to 10.00 1.00 ☆
F8.02 = 0: no motor overload protection function, there may be the risk of damage to the motor due to overheating, it is recommended that the thermal relay is installed between the
inverter and the motor;
F8.02 = 1: the inverter will determine whether the motor is overloaded or not according to the inverse time curve of motor overload protection. Inverse time curve of motor overload
protection: 220% x (F8.03) x rated motor current, if this lasts for 1 second, the alarm of motor
will be prompted overload fault; 150% x (F8.03) × rated motor current, if this lasts for 60 seconds, the alarm of motor overload will be prompted.
User shall correctly set the value of F8.03 according to the Actual motor overload capacity,
if the value is set to too large , which may easily lead to motor overheating and damage while the inverter will not alarm!
F8.04 Motor overload pre-alarm
coefficient 50% to 100% 80% ☆
This function is used in the front of motor overload fault protection, and sends a pre-alarm signal to the control system by DO. The warning coefficient is used to determine the extent of
pre-alarm prior to motor overload protection. The higher the value, the smaller the extent of pre-
alarm in advance. When the cumulative amount of inverter output current is greater than the product of the
inverse time curve of overload and F8.04, the inverter multi-function digital DO will output
"Motor Overload Pre-Alarm" ON signal.
F8.05 Overvoltage stall gain 0 (no overvoltage stall) to 100 0 ☆
F8.06
Overvoltage stall protection
voltage / energy consumption brake voltage
120% to 150%(three-phase) 130% ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
106
In the process of the inverter deceleration, when the DC bus voltage exceeds the
overvoltage stall protection voltage/the energy consumption brake voltage, the inverter stops
deceleration and maintains at the current operating frequency(if F3.12 is not set to 0, the
braking signal is outputted the energy consumption brake can be implemented by an external braking resistor.) and then continues to decelerate upon decline of the bus voltage
Overvoltage stall gain is used for adjusting inhibition overvoltage capability during
deceleration. The greater this value, the stronger inhibition overvoltage capability under the premise that the overvoltage does not occur, the best is the smaller gain setting.
For the small inertia load, the overvoltage stall gain should be small, otherwise which
cause the slower system dynamic response. For the big inertia load, the overvoltage stall gain should be large, otherwise the poor inhibitory effect may cause overvoltage fault.
When the overvoltage stall gain is set to 0, the overvoltage stall function will be canceled.
F8.07 Input phase
loss protection
Units
digit
Input phase loss protection
selection
11 ☆
Prohibit 0
Allow 1
Tens
digit Contactor actuation protection
Prohibit 0
Allow 1 The input phase loss protection function is only for PI9000 G type inverter with 18.5kW or
above, not for the F type inverter with 18.5kW or below and however F8.07 is set to 0 or 1.
F8.08 Output phase loss protection
selection
Prohibit 0 1 ☆
Allow 1
Select whether the output phase loss protection is done or not.
F8.09 Power-on short
circuit to ground
Invalid 0 1 ☆
Valid 1
You can detect whether the motor is shorted to ground when the inverter is powered on. If this function is active, the inverter's UVW terminal will output voltage after power-on
for a while.
F8.10 Number of automatic fault reset 0 to 32767 0 ☆
When the inverter selects automatic fault reset, it is used to set the number of times of
automatic fault reset. If the set number of times is exceeded, the inverter remains a failed state. When set F8.10 (number of automatic fault reset) ≥ 1, inverter will run automatically when
repower after instantaneous power-off.
When fault self-recovery restart uptime over an hour later, it will restore the original setting of automatic fault reset.
F8.11 Fault DO action selection during
automatic fault reset
OFF 0 0 ☆
ON 1
If the inverter automatic fault reset function is set, F8.10 can be used to set whether DO
action is active or not during the automatic fault reset
F8.12 Automatic fault reset interval 0.1s to 100.0s 1.0s ☆
It is the waiting time from the inverter fault alarm to automatic fault reset.
F8.13 Overspeed detection value 0.00% to 50.0%
(maximum frequency) 20.0% ☆
F8.14 Overspeed detection time 0.0s to 60.0s 1.0s ☆
This feature is only available when the inverter runs with speed sensor vector control. When the inverter detects that the actual motor speed exceeds the set frequency, and the
excess is greater than the overspeed detection value(F8.13), and the duration is greater than the
Chapter 5 Function parameter
107
overspeed detection time(F8.14) the inverter will alarm fault ID Err.43, and troubleshoots
according to the protection action.
F8.15 Detection value for too large speed deviation
0.00% to 50.0%
(maximum frequency) 20.0% ☆
F8.16 Detection time for too large speed deviation 0.0s to 60.0s 5.0s ☆
This feature is only available when the inverter runs with speed sensor vector control.
When the inverter detects that the actual motor speed is different from the set frequency,
and the deviation is greater than the detection value for too large speed deviation(F8.15), and the duration is greater than the detection time for too large speed deviation(F8.16), the inverter
will alarm fault ID Err.42, and troubleshoots according to the protection action.
If the detection time for too large speed deviation is 0.0s, the detection for too large speed deviation is canceled.
F8.17 Fault protection
action selection 1
Units
digit
Motor overload (Fault ID
Err.11)
00000 ☆
Free stop 0
Stop at the selected mode 1
Continue to run 2
Tens digit
Input phase loss(Fault ID Err.12)(same as units digit)
Hundr
eds digit
Output phase loss(Fault ID
Err.13)(same as units digit)
Thous
ands
digit
External fault(Fault ID Err.15)(same as units digit)
Ten
thousa
nds digit
Communication
abnormal(Fault ID
Err.16)(same as units digit)
F8.18 Fault protection
action selection 2
Units
digit
Encoder fault(Fault ID
Err.20)
00000 ☆
Free stop 0 Switch to V/F and then stop at
the selected mode 1
Switch to V/F and continue to
run 2
Tens
digit
Function code read and
write abnormal(Fault ID Err.21)
Free stop 0
Stop at the selected mode 1
Hundreds
digit
Reserved
Thous
ands digit
Motor overheating(Fault ID
Err.45)( same as F8.17 units digit)
Ten
thousands
digit
Running time arrival(Fault
ID Err.26)( same as F8.17
units digit)
F8.19 Fault protection action Units Custom fault 1 (Fault ID 00000 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
108
selection 3 digit Err.27)( same as F8.17 units
digit)
Tens digit
Custom fault 2 (Fault ID
Err.28)( same as F8.17 units
digit)
Hundr
eds
digit
Power-on time arrival(Fault
ID Err.29)( same as F8.17
units digit)
Thousands
digit
Load drop(Fault ID Err.30)
Free stop 0
Stop at the selected mode 1 Decelerate to 7% of the rated
frequency of motor and
continue to run, automatically return to the set frequency to
run if the load drop does not
happen.
2
Ten thous
ands
digit
PID feedback loss when running(Fault ID
Err.31)( same as F8.17 units
digit)
F8.20 Fault protection action selection 4
Units
digit
Too large speed
deviation(Fault ID
Err.42)( same as F8.17 units digit)
00000 ☆
Tens
digit
Motor overspeed(Fault ID
Err.43)( same as F8.17 units digit)
Hund
reds
digit
Initial position error(Fault
ID Err.51)( same as F8.17
units digit)
Thou
sands
digit
Reserved
Ten thous
ands
digit
Reserved
When "free stop" is selected, the inverter displays Err. *, and directly stops.
When "Stop at the selected mode" is selected, the inverter displays Arr. *, firstly stops at
the selected mode and then displays Err. * When "continue to run" is selected, the inverter
continues to run and displays Arr. *, the operating frequency is set by F8.24.
F8.21 Reserved
F8.22 Reserved
F8.23 Reserved
F8.24
Continue running
frequency selection
when failure happens
Running at current frequency 0
0 ☆ Running at set frequency 1
Running at upper limit
frequency 2
Chapter 5 Function parameter
109
Running at lower limit
frequency 3
Running at abnormal spare
frequency 4
F8.25 Abnormal spare frequency
60.0% to 100.0% 100 ☆
When the inverter occurs faults during operation, and the troubleshooting mode for the
fault is set to "continue to run", the inverter displays Arr. *, and runs at the operating frequency
set by F8.24. When "abnormal spare frequency" is selected, the value set by F8.25 is the percentage of
the maximum frequency
F8.26 Momentary power cut action
selection
Invalid 0
0 ☆ Deceleration 1
Deceleration and stop 2
F8.27 Voltage protection of
momentary power cut 50.0% to 100.0% 90% ☆
F8.28 Recovery voltage judgment time of momentary power cut
0.00s to 100.00s 0.50s ☆
F8.29 Judgment voltage of momentary
power cut no action
50.0% to 100.0%
(standard bus voltage) 80.0% ☆
Bus voltage
Running frequency
Instantaneous power failure action
to determine the voltage F8.27
Instantaneous
power failure
protection voltageF8.29
Running frequency
Recovery voltage judgment time
of momentary power cutF8.28
F8.26=1
deceleration
Time t
Time t
Time t
Recovery acceleration
time
(F8.26=2:Deceleration
and stop)
Deceleration 4
Deceleration 4 Figure 5-27 Schematic diagram of momentary power cutaction
This feature means that when the momentary power cut happens or the voltage suddenly
reduces, the drive will reduce the output speed to compensate the reduced value of the inverter
DC bus voltage by using load feedback energy, in order to maintain the inverter to continue running.
If F8.26 = 1, when the momentary power cut happens or the voltage suddenly reduces, the
inverter will decelerate, when the bus voltage is back to normal, the inverter will normally accelerate to the set frequency to run. To determine whether the bus voltage returns to normal or
not, check whether the bus voltage is normal and lasts for longer than the set time by F8.28.
If F8.26 = 2, when the momentary power cut happens or the voltage suddenly reduces, the inverter will decelerate till to stop.
F8.30 Load drop protection selection Invalid 0 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
110
Valid 1
F8.31 Load drop detection level 0.0% to 100.0% (rated motor current)
10.0% ☆
F8.32 Load drop detection time 0.0s to 60.0s 1.0s ☆
If the load drop protection function is active, when the inverter output current is less than the load drop detection level (F8.31)and the duration is longer than the load drop detection
time(F8.32), the inverter output frequency is automatically reduced to 7% of the rated
frequency. During the load drop protection, if the load recovers, the inverter automatically resumes to the set frequency to run.
F8.33 The motor temperature sensor
type3 0:Invalid;1:testing 0 ☆
Motor temperature sensor signal,need to connect to the panel J16 terminal, will be received PT100 J15 jumper cap short end. New control board needs to connect with CON60 terminal.
F8.34 Motor overheating protection
threshold3 0~200 110 ☆
F8.35 Motor overheating forecasting warning threshold3
0~200 90 ☆
When the motor temperature more than motor overheating protection valve value F8.34,
frequency converter fault alarm, and according to the selected fault protection action way. When the motor temperature exceeds motor overheating if forecasting warning threshold
F8.35 ,inverter multifunction DO early warning ON signal output motor overheating. The motor
temperature in d0.41 display. Note:“Superscript3” means software version above C3.00 with MCU keyboard have this
function.
5-2-11.Communications parameters: F9.00-F9.07
Please refer to PI9000 Communication Protocol
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
F9.00 Baud rate
Units digit MODBUS
6005 ☆
300BPS 0
600BPS 1
1200BPS 2
2400BPS 3
4800BPS 4
9600BPS 5
19200BPS 6
38400BPS 7
57600BPS 8
115200BPS 9
Tens digit Profibus-DP
115200BPS 0
208300BPS 1
256000BPS 2
512000BPS 3
Hundreds digit Reserved
Thousands digit CAN bus baudrate
20 0
50 1
100 2
125 3
Chapter 5 Function parameter
111
250 4
500 5
1M 6
F9.01 Data format
No parity (8-N-2) 0
0 ☆ Even parity (8-E-1) 1 Odd parity (8-O-1) 2 No parity(8-N-1) 3
F9.02 This unit address 1 to 250, 0 for broadcast address 1 ☆
F9.03 Response delay 0ms-20ms 2ms ☆
F9.04 Reserved
F9.05 Data transfer format
selection
Units digit MODBUS
31 ☆
Non-standard
MODBUS protocol 0
Standard MODBUS
protocol 1
Tens digit Profibus
PPO1 format 0 PPO2 format 1 PPO3 format 2
PPO5 format 3
F9.06 Communication read
current resolution
0.01A 0 0 ☆
0.1A 1
F9.07 Communication card
type
0:Modbus
communication card 0
0 ☆
1:Profibus
communication card 1
2:Reserved 2
3:CAN bus communication card
3
5-2-12.Torque control parameters:FA.00-FA.07
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
FA.00 Speed/torque control
mode selection
Speed control 0 0 ★
Torque control 1 Used to select the inverter control mode: speed control or torque control.
PI9000 multifunction digital terminal has two related functions on torque control: torque
control banned (function 29), and speed control / torque control switching (function 46). The
two terminals must use in conjunction with FA.00 so as to switch between speed control and
torque control. When the speed control / torque control switching terminal is invalid, the control mode is
determined by FA.00, if the terminal is valid, the control manner is equivalent to the FA.00's
value negated. In any case, when the torque control ban terminal is valid, the inverter is fixed at speed
control mode.
FA.01
Torque setting source
selection under torque
control mode
Keyboard setting
(FA.02) 0
0 ★ Analog AI1 setting 1
Analog AI2 setting 2
Chapter 5 Function parameter
112
Panel potentiometer
setting 3
High-speed pulse setting 4
Communications
reference 5
MIN(AI1, AI2) 6
MAX(AI1, AI2) 7
Analog AI3 setting 8
FA.02
Torque digital setting
under torque control mode
-200.0% to 200.0% 150% ☆
FA.01 is used to select the torque setting source, there are eight torque setting modes in all.
The torque setting adopts the relative value, the 100.0% corresponds to the rated torque of
inverter. Setting range is from -200.0% to 200.0%, indicating that the maximum torque of inverter is 2 times of the rated torque of inverter.
When the given torque is positive, the inverter runs forwardly
When the given torque is negative, the inverter runs reversely When the torque setting adopts mode 1 to 7, the 100% of communications, analog input
and pulse input corresponds to FA.02.
FA.03 Torque control
acceleration time 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆
FA.04 Torque control
deceleration time 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆
Under the torque control mode, the difference between the motor output torque and load
torque determines the change rate in speed of the motor and load, therefore, the motor speed
may rapidly change, resulting in the problems such as noise or excessive mechanical stress. By setting the torque control ac/deceleration time, you can make a smooth change of motor speed.
But the occasions that needs the rapid response of torque, the torque control
ac/deceleration time must be set to 0.00s. For example: when two hardwired motors drag the same one load, in order to ensure that the load is evenly distributed, you must set one inverter as
the master unit that works under the speed control mode, the other inverter as the auxiliary unit
that works under the torque control mode, the Actual output torque of the master unit is used as the torque command of the auxiliary, the torque of the auxiliary needs quickly follow the master
unit, so the torque control ac/deceleration time of the auxiliary unit shall be set to 0.00s.
FA.05 Torque control forward
maximum frequency
0.00Hz to maximum
frequency(F0.19) 50.00Hz ☆
FA.06 Torque control reverse
maximum frequency
0.00Hz to maximum
frequency(F0.19) 50.00Hz ☆
Used to set the maximum operating frequency of inverter forward or reverse running under the torque control mode
Under the torque control mode, if the load torque is less than the motor output torque, the
motor speed will continue to rise, in order to prevent "Runaway" and other accidents of mechanical systems, it is necessary to limit the maximum speed of motor under the torque
control mode.
FA.07 Torque filter time 0.00s to 10.00s 0.00s ☆
5-2-13.Control optimization parameters: Fb.00-Fb.09
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
Fb.00 Fast current limiting
manner
Disable 0 1 ☆
Enable 1 Enable Quick Current Limiting function, which can minimize the overcurrent fault of
Chapter 5 Function parameter
113
inverter , and ensure the uninterrupted operation of inverter. If the drive is in the state of fast
current limiting for a long period of time , the inverter may be damaged by overheating and
others, this case is not allowed, so the inverter will alarm fault with fault ID Err.40, it indicates
that the inverter exists overload and needs to be shut down.
Fb.01 Undervoltage point setting 50.0% to 140.0% 100.0% ☆
Used to set the voltage value of inverter undervoltage fault with fault ID Err.09 , the
different voltage levels of inverter 100.0% corresponds to the different voltage points are as follows:
Single-phase 220V or three-phase 220V: 200V three-phase 380V: 350V
Three-phase 480V: 450V three-phase 690V: 650V
Fb.02 Overvoltage point setting 200.0V to 2500.0V - ★
The setting over voltage point of the software has no influence on the setting over voltage
point of the hardware. The value of the voltage setted to the frequency inverter, different voltage level „s factory
defaults are as following:
Voltage level over voltage point factory defaults
Single phase 220V 400.0V
Three phase 220V 400.0V
Three phase 380V 810.0V
Three phase 480V 890.0V
Three phase 690V 1300.0V
Remark: Meanwhile, the factory defaults are the upper llimit value of over voltage protectation in frequency inverter. Only when Fb.02 setting value is smaller than all voltage
factory defaults, the new parameter setting takes effect. If it is higher than factory defaults,
factory defaults will be the standard value.
Fb.03 Deadband compensation
mode selection
No compensation 0 1 ☆ Compensation mode 1 1
Compensation mode 2 2 Generally do not need to modify this parameter, only when the special requirements to the
output voltage waveform quality is required or when the motor oscillation and other abnormal
happen, you need to try to switch to select a different mode of compensation.
The compensation mode 2 for high-power is recommended.
Fb.04 Current detection
compensation 0 to 100 5 ☆
Used to set the inverter's current sensing compensation, if the set value is too large, which
may reduce the control performance. Generally do not need to be modified.
Fb.05 Vector optimization without
PG mode selection
No optimization 0
1 ★ Optimization mode 1 1
Optimization mode 2 2
Fb.06 Upper limiting frequency for
DPWM switching 0.00Hz to 15.00Hz 12.00Hz ☆
Fb.07 PWM modulation manner Asynchronous 0
0 ☆ Synchronou 1
Only valid for V/F control. Synchronous modulation refers to that the carrier frequency
linearly change with the change of output frequency, in order to ensure the unchanged of their
ratio(carrier to noise ratio), generally it is used when the output frequency is higher, is conducive to ensure the output voltage quality.
Under the lower output frequency (100Hz) mode, generally the synchronize modulation is
Chapter 5 Function parameter
114
not required, because at the time the ratio of the carrier frequency to the output frequency is
relatively high, the asynchronous modulation has more obvious advantages.
When the operating frequency is higher than 85Hz, the synchronous modulation takes
effect, the fixed mode is the asynchronous modulation below the frequency.
Fb.08 Random PWM depth
Random PWM invalid 0
0 ☆ PWM carrier
frequency random
depth
1 to 10
By setting Random PWM, the monotonous and shrill motor sound can become softer and which helps reduce external electromagnetic interference. When Random PWM Depth is set to
0, Random PWM will be invalid. It will get different results by adjusting different Random
PWM Depths,
Fb.09 Deadband time
adjustment 100% to 200% 150% ☆
About 1140V voltage setting, the voltage availability will be improved by adjust voltage
setting. Too lower value setting can lead to system instability. So it is not recommended to
revise it for users.
5-2-14.Extended parameter:FC.00-FC.02
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
FC.00 Undefined
FC.01 Proportional linkage coefficient 0.00 to 10.00 0 ☆
When proportional linkage coefficient is 0, proportional linkage function can not work. According to the setting by proportional linkage, communication address of master (F9.02)
is set to 248, and communication address of slave is set to 1 to 247.
Slave output frequency = Master setting frequency * Proportional linkage coefficient + UP/DOWN Changes.
FC.02 PID start deviation 0.0 to 100.0 0 ☆
If the absolute value of deviation between PID setting source and feedback source is greater than of the parameter, the inverter starts only when PID output frequency is greater than
the wake-up frequency to prevent the repetition of the inverter starts.
If the inverter is operating, when PID feedback source is greater than setting source and the output frequency is less than or equal to (F7.48) sleep frequency, the inverter goes to sleep
after (F7.49) delay time and performs free stop.
If the inverter is in the state of sleep and the current run command is valid, the absolute value of deviation between PID setting source and feedback source is greater than of PID start
deviation (FC.02), when PID setting frequency is greater than or equal to F7.46 wake-up
frequency, the inverter will start after (F7.47) delay time.
If you want to use the function of PID start deviation, PID stop computing status must be
set to active (E2.27 = 1).
5-2-15.Wobbulate, fixed-length and counting:E0.00-E0.11 Wobbulate function is suitable for the textile, chemical, and other industries, as well as
occasions that needs traverse and winding function. Wobbulate function means that the inverter output frequency swings up and down to set the frequency centering around the set frequency, the
locus the operating frequency on the timeline is as shown in figure, which the swing amplitude is
set by E0.00 and E0.01, when E0.01 is set to 0, the wobbulate will not work.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
115
Output
frequency (Hz)
Wobbulate upper limit frequency
Center frequency(Fset)
Wobbulate lower limit frequency
Wobbulate rangeAw = Fset*E0.01
Textile jump frequency= Aw*E0.02
Wobbulate
cycle
Triangle
wave rise
time
Decelerate at the
deceleration
time
Accelerate at the
acceleration time
Running
command
Time t
+Aw
-Aw
Figure 5-28 Schematic diagram of wobbulate operating
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
E0.00 Swing setting manner Relative to center frequency 0
0 ☆ Relative to maximum
frequency 1
This parameter is used to determine the baseline of the swing 0: relative to center frequency(F0.07 frequency source)
For the variable swing system. The swing varies with the change of center frequency (the set
frequency) 1: relative to maximum frequency(F0.19)
For the fixed swing system, the swing is fixed
E0.01 Wobbulate range 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E0.02 Sudden jump frequency
range 0.0% to 50.0% 0.0% ☆
The parameter is used to determine the value of swing and the value of sudden jump frequency.
When the swing is set to Relative To Center frequency(E0.00=0), Swing (AW) = frequency
source (F0.07) × swing amplitude((E0.01). When the swing is set to Relative To Maximum Frequency(E0.00=1), Swing (AW) = maximum frequency (F0.19) × swing amplitude((E0.01).
If the sudden jump frequency range is selected for wobbulate operation, the frequency
percentage of sudden jump frequency range relative to swing, i.e.: Sudden jump frequency = Swing(AW)×Sudden jump frequency range(E0.02). When the swing is set to Relative To Center
frequency(E0.00=0), the sudden jump frequency is the variable value. When the swing is set to
Relative To Middle Frequency(E0.00=1), the sudden jump frequency is the fixed value. The frequency of wobbulate operation is restricted by the upper and lower frequencies.
E0.03 Wobbulate cycle 0.1s to 3000.0s 10.0s ☆
E0.04 Triangle wave rise time coefficient 0.1% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆
Wobbulate cycle: the time of a complete wobbulate cycle.
Triangle wave rise time coefficient(E0.04), the time percentage of Riangle Wave Rise Time relative to Wobbulate Cycle(E0.03) Triangle wave rise time = Wobbulate cycle(E0.03) ×
Triangle wave rise time coefficient(E0.04), unit: second(s). Triangle wave drop time = Wobbulate
cycle(E0.03) × (1 - Triangle wave rise time coefficient(E0.04)), unit: second(s).
E0.05 Set length 0m to 65535m 1000m ☆
E0.06 Actual length 0m to 65535m 0m ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
116
E0.07 Pulse per meter 0.1 to 6553.5 100.0 ☆
The above function codes are used to fixed-length control.
The length information is sampled through the multi-function digital input terminal, the
pulse number sampled by terminal divides the pulse per meter(E0.07), so then the Actual length(E0.06) can be computed out. When the Actual length is greater than the set length (E0.05),
the multi-functional digital DO will output "Length Arrival" ON signal.
During the fixed-length control, the multifunction DI terminal can be used to reset length (DI function selects 28), please refer to F1.00 to F1.09 for details.
In some applications, the related input terminal function shall be set to "Length Count
Input"(function 27), when the pulse frequency is higher, DI5 port must be used .
E0.08 Set count value 1 to 65535 1000 ☆
E0.09 Specified count value 1 to 65535 1000 ☆
The count value needs to be sampled through the multi-function digital input terminal. In
some applications, the related input terminal function shall be set to "Counter Input"(function
25), when the pulse frequency is higher, DI5 port must be used . When the count value reaches the set count value(E0.08), the multifunction digital DO will
output "Set Count Value Arrival" ON signal, then the counter stops counting.
When the count value reaches the specified count value(E0.09), the multifunction digital DO will output "Specified Count Value Arrival" ON signal, then the counter continues to count, and
then stop till the set count value.
The figure is the schematic diagram of E0.08 = 8 and E0.09 = 4.
Set count DO
1Count pulse DI5
Specified
counting relay
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Figure 5-29 Schematic diagram of the set count value
reference and the specified count value
E0.10 Reduction frequency pulse number
0:invalid;1~65535 0 ☆
E0.11 Reduction frequency 0.00Hz~F0.19(max frequency) 5.00Hz ☆
Applications need to the corresponding input terminals function is set to "counter input"(function 25), when set count (E0.08) = count (d0.12) + reduction frequency pulse number
(E0.10), the converter automatically slow down to the set reduction frequency (E0.11) run.
Remark: To reset the Count value need to the corresponding input terminals function be set to "counter reset" (function 26)
When count value (d0.12) is above reduction frequency pulse number, the converter can not
run
5-2-16.Multi-stage command, simple PLC: E1.00-E1.51
PI9000's multi-stage command has the richer function than the usual multi-speed command, in
addition to the multi-speed function , it can also be used as process PID reference source. Therefore,
the dimensionl of multi-stage command is a relative value.
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chang
e limits
E1.00 0-stage speed setting 0X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
117
E1.01 1-stage speed setting 1X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.02 2-stage speed setting 2X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.03 3-stage speed setting 3X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.04 4-stage speed setting 4X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.05 5-stage speed setting 5X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.06 6-stage speed setting 6X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.07 7-stage speed setting 7X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.08 8-stage speed setting 8X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.09 9-stage speed setting 9X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.10 10-stage speed setting 10X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.11 11-stage speed setting 11X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.12 12-stage speed setting 12X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.13 13-stage speed setting 13X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.14 14-stage speed setting 14X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E1.15 15-stage speed setting 15X -100.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
The multi-stage command can be used as frequency source, can also act as the set source of
process PID. The dimension of multi-stage command is the relative values and its range is from -
100.0% to 100.0%, when it acts as the frequency source, it is the percentage of maximum frequency; due to the PID reference is originally as a relative value, therefore the multi-stage
command acts as the set source of PID and does not need dimension conversion.
The multi-stage command needs to switch according to the different states of multifunction digital DI, please refer to F1 group for specific instructions
E1.16 Simple PLC running
mode
Stop after single running 0
0 ☆ Hold final value after single
running 1
Circulating 2
The figure is the schematic diagram of Simple PLC as the frequency source. For Simple
PLC as the frequency source, the positive or negative value of E1.00 to E1.15 determines the
running direction, the negative value indicates that the inverter runs at the opposite direction. As the frequency source, PLC operates in three modes, including:
0: stop after single running
After the inverter completes a single cycle, it will automatically shut down , the running command must be given before restart.
1: hold final value after single running
After the inverter completes a single cycle, it will automatically maintain the frequency and direction of the last stage.
2: circulating
After the inverter completes a cycle, it will automatically start next cycle, and stop till the stop command is given.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
118
Running
direction
Time t
... ...
E1.19
E1.00
E1.21
E1.01
E1.02
E1.14
E1.25
250ms Pulse
DO or RELAYoutput
E1.23E1.20E1.18
Figure 5-30 Schematic diagram of simple PLC
E1.17
Simple PLC power-
down memory
selection
Units digit Power-down memory selection
11 ☆
Power-down without memory 0
Power-down with memory 1
Tens digit Stop memory selection
Stop without memory 0
Stop with memory 1 PLC "Power-Down With Memory" means that the PLC operating stage and frequency
before power-down are memorized, and then it will continue to run from the position of the
memorized stage in next power-on. If Power-Down Without Memory is selected, the PLC process will restart from the starting position for each power-on
PLC "Stop With Memory" means that the PLC operating stage and frequency before stop are
recorded, and then it will continue to run from the position of the recorded stage in next run. If Stop Without Memory is selected, the PLC process will restart from the starting position for each
start.
E1.18 0 stage running time T0 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.19 0 stage ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.20 1 stage running time T1 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.21 1 stage ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.22 2 stage running time T2 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.23 2 stage ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.24 3 stage running time T3 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.25 3 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.26 4 stage running time T4 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.27 4 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.28 5 stage running time T5 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.29 5 stage ac/deceleration time 0 to 3 0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
119
selection
E1.30 6 stage running time T6 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.31 6 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.32 7 stage running time T7 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.33 7 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.34 8 stage running time T8 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.35 8 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.36 9 stage running time T9 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.37 9 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.38 10 stage running time T10 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.39 10 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.40 11 stage running time T11 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.41 11 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.42 12 stage running time T12 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.43 12 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.44 13 stage running time T13 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.45 13 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.46 14 stage running time T14 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.47 14 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
E1.48 15 stage running time T15 0.0s(h) to 6500.0s(h) 0.0s(h) ☆
E1.49 15 stage ac/deceleration time
selection 0 to 3 0 ☆
Multi-speed operation and deceleration time selection 0 to 3 , corresponding to the function code:
0: F0.13、F0.14; 1:F7.08、F7.09; 2:F7.10、F7.11; 3:F7.12、F7.13
E1.50 Simple PLC run-time unit S (seconds) 0
0 ☆ H (hours) 1
E1.51 Multi-stage command 0
reference manner
Function code E1.00
reference 0
0 ☆
Analog AI1 reference
1
Analog AI2
reference 2
Panel potentiometer reference
3
High-speed pulse
reference 4
PID control reference
5
Keyboard set
frequency (F0.01) reference,
UP/DOWN can be
6
Chapter 5 Function parameter
120
modified
Analog AI3 reference
7
This parameter determines the multi-stage command 0 reference channel.
The multi-stage command 0 not only can select E1.00, but also there are a variety of other options so as to facilitate switching between the multi-stage command and the other reference
manner.
5-2-17.PID function: E2.00-E2.32
PID control is a commonly used method of process control, a closed loop system is formed by
the proportional, integral and differential operation of difference between the controlled value
feedback signal and target value signal and by adjusting the inverter output frequency so as to
stabilize the controlled value at the position of the target value.
Suitable for flow control, pressure control and temperature control and other process control
applications.
PID output
control amount
P
1Ti
1S
Td*s+1
1
Targetamount
-
+
Feedback amount
Figure 5-30 Flow diagram of process PID principle
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
E2.00 PID reference source
E2.01 setting 0
0 ☆`
Analog AI1 reference 1
Analog AI2 reference 2
Panel potentiometer reference 3
High-speed pulse setting 4
Communications setting 5
Multi-stage command setting 6
Analog AI3 reference 7
E2.01 PID keyboard reference 0.0% to 100.0% 50.0% ☆
This parameter is used to select the process PID target value reference channel.
The set target value of process PID is a relative value, the setting range is from 0.0% to
100.0%. The feedback value of PID is also a relative value, the role of PID is to remain the same
for the two relative values.
E2.02 PID feedback source
Analog AI1 reference 0
0 ☆
Analog AI2 reference 1
Panel potentiometer setting 2
AI1-AI2 3
High-speed pulse setting 4
Communications setting 5
AI1+AI2 6
MAX(|AI1|, |AI2|) 7
Chapter 5 Function parameter
121
MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|) 8
Analog AI3 reference 9
This parameter is used to select the process PID feedback signal channel. The feedback value of process PID is also a relative value, the setting range is from 0.0% to
100.0%.
E2.03 PID action direction Positive 0
0 ☆ Negative 1
E2.04 PID reference feedback range 0 to 65535 1000 ☆
PID reference feedback range is a dimensionsless unit for PID setting display(d0.15) and PID feedback display(d0.16).
The 100.0% of the relative value of PID reference feedback corresponds to a setting
feedback range(E2.04). If E2.04 is set to 2000, when PID setting is 100.0%, PID setting display(d0.15) will be 2000.
E2.05 PID inversion cutoff frequency 0.00 to F0.19(maximum
frequency) 0.00Hz ☆
In some cases, only when the PID output frequency is negative (i.e.the inverter reverses), PID can control the reference value and the feedback value to the same states, but the excessive
inversion frequency is not allowed in some occasions, E2.05 is used to the upper limit of
determine inversion frequency.
E2.06 PID deviation limit 0.0% to 100.0% 0 ☆
When the deviation between PID reference value and PID feedback value is less than E2.06,
PID will stop regulating action. Thus, when the deviation is lesser, the output frequency will be stable, it is especially effective for some closed-loop control occasions.
E2.07 PID differential limiting 0.00% to 100.00% 0.10% ☆
The role of the differential is more sensitive in PID regulator, is likely to cause system oscillation, generally the role is limited to a smaller range, E2.07 is used to set PID differential
output range.
E2.08 PID reference change time 0.00s to 650.00s 0.00s ☆ The PID reference change time means the required time that PID reference value changes
from 0.0% to 100.0%.
When the PID reference changes, the PID reference value will change linearly according to the reference change time to reduce the adverse effects to the system caused by a sudden
reference change.
E2.09 PID feedback filter time 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆
E2.10 PID output filter time 0.00s to 60.00s 0.00s ☆ E2.09 is used for filtering the PID feedback quantity, the filter helps reduce the influence of
interference to the feedback quantity, but will bring the response performance of the process
closed loop system. E2.10 is used for filtering the PID output frequency, the filter will weaken the sudden
change of the inverter output frequency, but it will also bring the response performance of the
process closed loop system.
E2.11 PID feedback loss
detection value
0.0%: not judged feedback loss 0.0% ☆
0.1% to 100.0%
E2.12 PID feedback loss
detection time 0.0s to 20.0s 0s ☆
This function code is used to determine whether the PID feedback is lost or not. When the PID feedback is less than the PID feedback loss detection value(E2.11), and the
duration is longer than the PID feedback loss detection time(E2.12), the inverter will alarm fault
ID Err.31, and troubleshoot according to the selected method.
E2.13 Proportional gain KP1 0.0 to 200.0 80.0 ☆
Chapter 5 Function parameter
122
E2.14 Integration time Ti1 0.01s to 10.00s 0.50s ☆
E2.15 Differential time Td1 0.00 to 10.000s 0.000s ☆
Proportional gain KP1:Used to decide the extent of the PID regulator, the greater KP1, the greater adjusting extent. This parameter 100.0 means that when the deviation of PID feedback
value and reference value is 100.0%, the PID regulator will adjust the output frequency command to the maximum frequency.
Integration time Ti1: used to decide the extent of integral adjustment of the PID regulator.
The shorter integration time, the greater extent of integral adjustment The integration time means that when the deviation of PID feedback value and reference value is 100.0%, the integration
regulator will successively adjust to the maximum frequency for the time.
Differential time Td1: used to decide the extent that the PID regulator adjusts the deviation change rate. The longer differential time, the greater extent of adjustment The differential time
means that the feedback value changes 100.0% within the time, the differential regulator will
adjust to the maximum frequency.
E2.16 Proportional gain KP2 0.0 to 200.0 20.0 ☆
E2.17 Integration time Ti2 0.01s to 10.00s 2.00s ☆
E2.18 Differential time Td2 0.000 to 10.000 0.000s ☆
E2.19 PID parameter switching
conditions
No switching 0
0 ☆
Switching through DI
terminal 1
Automatically switching
according to deviation. 2
E2.20 PID parameter switching
deviation 1 0.0% to E2.21 20.0% ☆
E2.21 PID parameter switching
deviation 2 E2.20 to 100.0% 80.0% ☆
In some applications, only one group of PID parameters can not meet the needs of the entire
run, it is required to use different PID parameters under different conditions. This group of function codes is used to switch between two groups of PID parameters.
Which the setting method for regulator parameter(E2.16 to E2.18) is similar to the
parameter(E2.13 to E2.15).The two groups of PID parameters can be switched by the multi-functional digital DI terminal, can also be switched automatically according to the PID
deviation.If you select the multi-functional DI terminal, the multi-function terminal function
selection shall be set to 43 (PID parameter switching terminal), select parameter group 1 (E2.13 E2.15) when the terminal is inactive, otherwise select parameter group 2 (E2.16 to E2.18).
If you select the automatic switch mode, and when the absolute value of deviation between
reference and feedback parameters is less than PID parameter switching deviation 1(E2.20), select parameter group 1 for PID parameter. When the absolute value of deviation between
reference and feedback parameters is more than PID parameter switching deviation 2(E2.21),
select parameter group 2 for PID parameter. If the deviation between reference and feedback parameters is between switching deviation 1 and switching deviation 2, PID parameter is the
linear interpolation of the two groups of PID parameters , as shown in the figure.
PID parameter 1E2.13、E2.14、E2.15
PID deviation
PIDparameter
E2.20 E2.21
PID parameter 2E2.16、E2.17、E2.18
Chapter 5 Function parameter
123
Figure 5-31 Flow diagram of process PID principle
E2.22 PID integral properties
Units digit Integral separation
00 ☆
Invalid 0
Valid 1
Tens digit Whether stop integration
when output reaches limit
Continue 0
Stop 1
Integral separation:
If the integral separation is set to active, when the integral pause of multifunction digital
DI(function 38) is active, PID integral will stop operations, at the time only the proportional and derivative actions of PID is active.
If the integral separation is set to inactive, however the multifunction digital DI is active or
inactive, the integral separation will be inactive. Whether stop integration when output reaches limit: you can select whether or not to stop the integral action after PID operation output reaches
the maximum or the minimum value If you select to stop the integral action, the PID integral will
stop the calculation, which may help to reduce the overshoot of PID.
E2.23 PID initial value 0.0% to 100.0% 0.0% ☆
E2.24 PID initial value hold time 0.00s to 360.00s 0.00s ☆
When the inverter starts, PID output is fixed at PID initial value(E2.23), and then continuous for the PID initial value hold time(E2.24), at last PID begins operation of the closed-loop
adjustment.
The figure is functional schematic of PID initial value.
PID initial valueE2.23
Time t
Output
frequency(Hz)
PID initial value hold time E2.24
Figure 5-32 Functional schematic of PID initial value This function is used to limit the deviation between two PID output beats(2ms/beats), in
order to suppress the too fast changes of PID output so that stabilizing the inverter operation.
E2.25 Maximum deviation of twice
outputs(forward) 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆
E2.26 Maximum deviation of twice
outputs(backward) 0.00% to 100.00% 1.00% ☆
E2.25 and E2.26 respectively corresponds to the maximum of the absolute value of output deviation when rotating forward and reverse.
E2.27 Computing status after
PID stop
Stop without computing 0 1 ☆
Stop with computing 1 Used to select whether to continue computing in the state of PID shutdown. Generally, PID
will stop computing in the state of shutdown.
E2.28 Reserve
E2.29 PID automatic frequency selection
invalid 0 1 ☆
valid 1
PID feedback value equal to the given value, the inverter frequency is reduced effectively.
When the inverter frequency effectively reduced ,the frequency converter detection time
Chapter 5 Function parameter
124
interval E2.31 reduced frequency, every time decrease frequency of 0.5 HZ, if in the process of
reducing frequency feedback value is less than the given value, inverter speed up directly to the
set value.
E2.30 Stop frequency 0Hz~ max frequency 25Hz ☆
The function code only can be used when the automatic frequency reduction (E2.29) is
effective
Feedback value is greater than the given value of frequency converter, inverter frequency reduction to PID (E2.30) stop frequency, the PID testing number began to count, every PID
detection time (E2.31) a number of times, when the count reaches PID testing number (E2.32),
the inverter is slowing down. If in the counting process, feedback value is less than the given value, the inverter directly to accelerate the operation to the set frequency.
E2.31 PID checking time 0s~3600s 10 ☆
When PID frequency is effectively reduced, the time used to detect the frequency decline.
E2.32 PID testing time 10~500 20 ☆
This feature is associated with PID stop frequency setting, when reached to the test number
set, inverter will slow down then stop.
5-2-18.Virtual DI、Virtual DO:E3.00-E3.21
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Chang
e limit
E3.00 Virtual VDI1 terminal
function selection 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.01 Virtual VDI2 terminal
function selection 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.02 Virtual VDI3 terminal
function selection 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.03 Virtual VDI4 terminal
function selection 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.04 Virtual VDI5 terminal
function selection 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.05 Virtual VDI terminal
status set
Units digit Virtual VDI1
00000 ★
invalid 0
valid 1
Tens digit Virtual VDI2(0 to
1, same as above)
Hundreds
digit Virtual VDI3(0 to 1, same as above)
Thousand
s digit Virtual VDI4(0 to 1, same as above)
Tens of
thousands
digit
Virtual VDI5(0 to 1, same as above)
Chapter 5 Function parameter
125
E3.06 Virtual VDI terminal
effective status set mode
Units digit ddddigit:Virtual Virtual VDI1
11111 ★
VD1 whether valid is decided by Virtual
VDOX status 0
VD1 whether valid is decided by E3.05 1
Tens digit Virtual VDI2(0 to 1, same as
above)
Hundreds
digit
Virtual VDI3(0 to 1, same as
above)
Thousands
digit
Virtual VDI4(0 to 1, same as
above)
Tens of
thousands
digit
Virtual VDI5(0 to 1,same as above)
E3.07 AI1 terminal as a
function selection of DI 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.08 AI2 terminal as a
function selection of DI 0 to 50 0 ★
E3.09 Reserved
E3.10 Effective mode selection
when AI as DI
Units digit:AI1
0:High level effectively
1:Low level effectively
Tens digit:AI2(0 to 1,same as units digit)
Hundreds digit: AI3(same as units digit)
000 ★
E3.11 Virtual VDO1 output function selection
With the physical internal sub DIx 0
0 ☆ See F2 group physical DO output option
1to40
E3.12 Virtual VDO2 output
function selection
With the physical internal sub DIx 0
0 ☆ See F2 group physical DO output
option 1to40
E3.13 Virtual VDO3 output
function selection
With the physical internal sub DIx 0
0 ☆ See F2 group physical DO output option
1to40
E3.14 Virtual VDO4 output function selection
With the physical internal sub DIx 0
0 ☆
See F2 group physical DO output option 1to40
E3.15 Virtual VDO5 output function selection
With the physical internal sub DIx 0
0 ☆
See F2 group physical DO output option 1to40
Chapter 5 Function parameter
126
E3.16 VDO output terminal effective status selection
Units digit:VDO1
0:Positive logic
1:Negative logic
Tens digit: VDO2(0 to 1,same as above) Hundreds digit:VDO3(0 to 1,same as above)
Thousands digit:VDO4(0 to 1,same as above)
Tens of thousands digit:VDO5(0 to 1,same as above)
00000 ☆
E3.17 VDO1 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
E3.18 VDO2 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
E3.19 VDO3 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
E3.20 VDO4 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
E3.21 VDO5 output delay time 0.0s to 3600.0s 0.0s ☆
5-2-19.Motor parameters: b0.00-b0.35
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
Limit
b0.00 Motor type selection
General asynchronous motor 0
0 ★ Asynchronous inverter motor 1
Permanent magnet synchronous motor 2
b0.01 Rated power 0.1kW to 1000.0kW - ★
b0.02 Rated voltage 1V to 2000V - ★
b0.03 Rated current 0.01A to 655.35A (inverter power ≦ 55kW)
0.1A to 6553.5A (inverter rate> 55kW) - ★
b0.04 Rated frequency 0.01Hz to F0.19 (maximum frequency) - ★
b0.05 Rated speed 1rpm to 36000rpm - ★
Above b0.00 to b0.05 are the motor nameplate parameters, which affects the accuracy of the measured parameters. Please set up according to the motor nameplate parameters. The excellent
vector control performance needs the accurate motor parameters. The accurate identification of parameters is derived from the correct setting of rated motor parameters.
In order to guarantee the control performance, please configure your motor according to the
inverter standards, the motor rated current is limited to between 30% to 100% of the inverter rated current. The motor rated current can be set, but can not exceed the inverter rated current. This
parameter can be used to determine the inverter's overload protection capacity and energy
efficiency for the motor. It is used for the prevention of overheating caused by the self-cooled motor at low speed , or to
correct for protecting the motor when the little change of the motor characteristics may affect the
changes of the motor capacity.
b0.06 Asynchronous motor
stator resistance
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω (inverter power <= 55kW)
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω (inverter power>
55kW)
- ★
b0.07 Asynchronous motor
rotor resistance
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω (inverter power> 55kW)
- ★
b0.08 Asynchronous motor leakage inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter power> - ★
Chapter 5 Function parameter
127
55kW)
b0.09 Asynchronous motor
mutUal inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power <= 55kW)
0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter power>
55kW)
- ★
b0.10 Asynchronous motor
no-load current
0.01A to b0.03 (inverter power <= 55kW)
0.1A to b0.03 (inverter power> 55kW) - ★
b0.06 to b0.10 are the asynchronous motor parameters, and generally these parameters will not
appear on the motor nameplate and can be obtained by the inverter auto tunning. Among which, only three parameters of b0.06 to b0.08 can be obtained by Asynchronous Motor Parameters Still
Auto Tunning; however, not only all five parameters but also encoder phase sequence and current
loop PI parameters can be obtained by Asynchronous Motor Parameters Comprehensive Auto Tunning
When modifying the motor's rated power (b0.01) or rated voltage (b0.02), the inverter will
automatically calculate and modify the parameter values of b0.06 to b0.10 , and restore these 5
parameters to the motor parameters of commonly used standard Y Series.
If the asynchronous motor parameters auto tunning can not be achieved on-site, you can enter
the corresponding above parameters according to the parameters provided by the manufacturer.
b0.11 Synchronous motor
stator resistance
0.001Ω to 65.535Ω (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.0001Ω to 6.5535Ω (inverter power> 55kW)
- ★
b0.12 Synchronous D-
axis inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power <=
55kW)
0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter power> 55kW)
- ★
b0.13 Synchronous Q-axis inductance
0.01mH to 655.35mH (inverter power <=
55kW) 0.001mH to 65.535mH (inverter power>
55kW)
- ★
b0.14
Synchronous counter EMF
coefficient
0.1V to 6553.5V - ★
b0.15
tob0.26 Reserved
b0.27 Motor parameter
auto tunning
No operation 0
0 ★
Asynchronous motor parameters still auto
tunning 1
Asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning
2
Synchronous motor parameters self-
learning with load 11
Synchronous motor parameters self-learning without load
12
If the motor is able to disengage the load, in order to obtain a better operating performance,
you can choose comprehensive auto tunning; otherwise, you can only select parameters still auto
tunning. Firstly set the parameter according to load condition, and then press RUN key, the inverter will perform parameters auto tunning. Parameters auto tunning can be performed only under
keyboard operation mode, is not suitable for terminal operation mode and communication
operation mode. 0: no operation, which prohibits parameters auto tunning.
1: asynchronous motor parameters still auto tunning Motor type and motor nameplate parameters b0.00 to b0.05 must be set correctly before
performing asynchronous motor parameters still auto tunning. The inverter can obtain b0.06 to
Chapter 5 Function parameter
128
b0.08 three parameters before performing asynchronous motor parameters still auto tunning.
2: asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning
During asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the inverter firstly
performs parameters still auto tunning, and then accelerates up to 80% of the rated motor frequency according to the acceleration time F0.13, after a period of time, and then decelerates till stop
according to the deceleration time F0.14 to end auto tunning.
Before preforming asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, not only motor type and motor nameplate parameters b0.00 to b0.05 must be set properly, but also encoder
type and encoder pulses b0.29, b0.28.
For asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the inverter can obtain b0.06 to b0.10 five motor parameters, as well as the AB phase sequence b0.31 of encoder, vector control
current loop PI parameters F5.12 to F5.15.
11: Synchronous motor parameters self-learning with load When synchronous motor and the load can not be disengaged, have to choose synchronous
self-learning with load, in this process motor running at speed of 10rpm.
Before synchronous motor parameters self-learning with load, correct motor type and motor nameplate parameters b0.00 ~ b0.05 should be set. Synchronous motor parameters self-learning
with load, the drive can get the initial position angle of synchronous motor, which is a necessary
condition for the normal operation of synchronous motor, so before completing synchronous motor installation initial use, it must proceed parameters self-learning.
12: Synchronous motor parameters self-learning without load
If the motor and the load can be disengaged, it is recommended to choose synchronous motor self-learning without load, so as to get better running performance than synchronous motor self-
learning with load.
In self-learning without load process, the drive finish self-learning with load firstly, and then follow the acceleration time from F0.13 to F0.01, after a period of time, according to the
deceleration time F0.14 decelerate to stop and end the parameters self-learning. Note that when
proceeding identify operation, F0.01 value must be set as non-zero. Before synchronous motor parameters self-learning without load, not only need to set motor
type and nameplate parameters b0.00~b0.05, but also need to correctly set encoder type b0.28、
encoder pulse count b0.29、encoder number of pole-pairs b0.35.
Synchronous motor parameters self-learning without load, the drive can get b0.11 ~ b0.14
motor parameters, meanwhile it can get parameters of encoder b0.30、b0.31, b0.32、b0.33,
meanwhile get vector control current loop PI parameters F5.12 ~ F5.15.
Note: Motor self-learning can be only performed under keyboard operation mode, terminal operation and communication mode operation can not perform motor self-learning.
b0.28 Encoder type
ABZ incremental encoder 0
0 ★
UVW incremental encoder 1
Rotational transformer 2
Sine and cosine encoder 3
Wire-saving UVW encoder 4
PI9000 supports multiple encoder types, the different encoders need different PG card, please
correctly choose PG card. Synchronous motor can choose any of the 5 kinds of encoder, asynchronous motors generally only choose ABZ incremental encoder and rotational transformer.
PG card is installed, it is necessary to correctly set b0.28 according to the Actual situation,
otherwise the inverter may not play correctly.
b0.29 Encoder every turn pulse number 1 to 65535 2500 ★
Set ABZ or UVW incremental encoder per rotation pulses.
In vector control with PG, we must correct the parameter, otherwise the motor will not run properly
b0.30 Encoder installation angle 0.00 to 359.90 0.00 ★
Current detection compensation for setting inverter control,if it is set too large which may
cause performance degradation.
Chapter 5 Function parameter
129
The parameter is only valid to synchronous motors control, and it is valid to ABZ incremental
encoder, UVW incremental encoder, rotational transformer, wire-saving UVW encoder, while
invalid to sine and cosine encoders.
The parameter can used for obtaining parameters when performing synchronous motor parameters still auto tunning and synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, and it
is very important to the operation of asynchronous motors, therefore after the asynchronous motor
is first installed, the motor parameter auto tunning must be performed for functioning correctly.
b0.31 ABZ incremental encoder AB
phase sequence
Forward 0 0 ★
Reverse 1
The function code is only valid to ABZ incremental encoder, that is valid only when b0.28 = 0.
It is used to set the AB signal phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder.
The function codes are valid for asynchronous motors and synchronous motors, when preforming asynchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning or synchronous motor
parameters comprehensive auto tunning, the AB phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder can
be obtained.
b0.32 UVW encoder offset angle 0.00 to 359.90 0.00 ★
b0.33 UVW encoder UVW phase sequence Forward 0
0 ★ Reverse 1
The two parameters are valid only for synchronous motor with UVW encoder. The two parameters can used for obtaining parameters when performing synchronous motor
parameters still auto tunning and synchronous motor parameters comprehensive auto tunning, and
the two parameters are very important to the operation of asynchronous motors, therefore after the asynchronous motor is first installed, the motor parameter auto tunning must be performed for
functioning correctly.
b0.34 speed feedback PG disconnection
detection time
0.0s: OFF 0.0s ★
0.1s to 10.0s It is used to set encoder disconnection fault detection time, when it is set to 0.0s, the inverter
does not detect the disconnection fault of encoder.
When the inverter detects a disconnection fault, and the fault lasts for more than b0.34 set
time, the inverter gives out Alarm Err.20. message.
b0.35 Pole-pairs of rotary transformer 1 to 65535 1 ★
The rotary transformer has pole-pairs, the correct pole-pairs parameters must be set when
using the kind of encoder.
5-2-20.Function code management:y0.00-y0.04
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
y0.00 Parameter
initialization
No operation 0
0 ★
Restore the factory parameters, not
including motor parameters 1
Clear history 2 Restore default parameter values, including motor parameters 3
Backup current user parameters 4
Restore user backup parameters 50
1
Clear keyboard storage area3 10 upload parameter to keyboard storage
area 13 11
upload parameter to keyboard storage
area 23 12
download the parameters from 21
Chapter 5 Function parameter
130
keyboard storage 1 area to the storage
system 3
download the parameters from
keyboard storage 2 area to the storage
system 3 22
1: restore the factory setting, not including motor parameters
After y0.00 is set to 1, most of the inverter function parameters are restored to the factory
default parameters, but motor parameters, frequency command decimal point (F0.02), fault recording information, cumulative running time , cumulative power-on time and cumulative
power consumption will not be restored.
2: clear history To clear the history of the inverter's fault recording information, cumulative running time ,
cumulative power-on time and cumulative power consumption
3: restore default parameter values including motor parameters 4: backup current user parameters
Backup the parameters set by the current user. Backup all function parameters. It is easy to
restore the default settings when user incorrectly adjust parameters. 501, Restore user backup parameters
Restore previous backup user parameters.
10: Clear keyboard storage area3 Empty keyboard storage area 1 and keyboard storage area 23
11: upload parameter to keyboard storage area 13
Upload the parameters of the inverter to keyboard storage area 13 12: upload parameter to keyboard storage area 23
Upload the parameters of the inverter to the keyboard storage area 23
21: download the parameters from keyboard storage 1 area to the storage system3 Download the parameters from keyboard storage 1 to inverter
22:download the parameters from keyboard storage 2 area to the storage system3
Download the parameters from keyboard storage 2 to inverter
Note: “Superscript3”means software version of C3.00 and above with MCU keyboard have
such function.
y0.01 User password 0 to 65535 0 ☆ When y0.01 is set to one any non-zero number, the password protection will take effect. You
enter the menu for the next time, you must enter the password correctly, otherwise can not view and modify the function parameters, please keep in mind the set user password.
When y0.01 is set to 0, the set user password will be cleared, the password protection function
is invalid.
y0.02 Function parameters
display properties
Units digit d group display selection
11111 ★
Not display 0
Display 1 Tens digit E group display selection
Not display 0
Display 1
Hundreds
digit b group display selection
Not display 0
Display 1
Thousands
digit y group display selection
Not display 0
Display 1 Tens
thousands L group display selection
Chapter 5 Function parameter
131
digit
Not display 0
Display 1
y0.03 User Parameters
display
Units digit: Reserved
Tens digit :User‟s change parameter display
selection
0:not displays; 1:displays
00 ☆
y0.04
Function code
modification properties
Modifiable 0
0 ☆ Not modifiable
1
User can set whether function code parameter can be modified or not, so as to prevent the risk that function parameters are altered unexpectedly.
If the function code is set to 0, all function code can be modified; while it is set to 1, all
function code can only be viewed, can not be modified.
5-2-21.Fault query:y1.00-y1.30
Code Parameter name Setting range Factory
setting
Change
limits
y1.00 Type of the first fault 0 to 51 - ●
y1.01 Type of the second fault 0 to 51 - ●
y1.02 Type of the third(at last) fault 0 to 51 - ●
Record the type of the last three faults of inverter, 0 for no fault. Please refer to the related
instructions for the possible causes and solutions for each fault code.
Failure type table:
No. Failure type No. Failure type
0 No fault 21 Parameter read and write abnormal
1 Inverter unit protection 22 Inverter hardware abnormal
2 Acceleration overcurrent 23 Motor short to ground
3 Deceleration overcurrent
4 Constant speed overcurrent 24 Reserved
5 Acceleration overvoltage 25 Reserved
6 Deceleration overvoltage 26 Running time arrival
7 Constant speed overvoltage 27 Custom fault 1
8 Control power failure 28 Custom fault 2
9 Undervoltage 29 Power-on time arrival
10 Inverter overload 30 Off load
11 Motor Overload 31 PID feedback loss when running
12 Input phase loss 40 Fast current limiting timeout
13 Output phase loss 41 Switch motor when running
14 Module overheating 42 Too large speed deviation
15 External fault 43 Motor overspeed
16 Communication abnormal 45 Motor overtemperature
17 Contactor abnormal 51 Initial position error
18 Current detection abnormal COF communication failure
19 Motor auto tunning abnormal
20 Encoder/PG card abnormal
y1.03 Frequency of the third
fault
Frequency of the last fault ●
y1.04 Current of the third fault
Current of the last fault ●
Chapter 5 Function parameter
132
y1.05 Bus voltage of the
third fault
Bus voltage of the last fault ●
y1.06 Input terminal status
of the third fault
Input terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI0 When the input terminal is ON, the
corresponding binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted to the decimal number for
display.
●
y1.07 Output terminal status of the third fault
Output terminal status of the last fault, the order
is:
When the output terminal is ON, the
corresponding binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI
status is converted to the decimal number for display.
●
y1.08 Reserved
y1.09 Power-on time of the
third fault Current power-on time of the last fault ●
y1.10 Running time of the
third fault Current running time of the last fault ●
y1.11 to
y1.12 Reserved
y1.13 Frequency of the
second fault Frequency of the last fault ●
y1.14 Current of the second
fault Current of the last fault ●
y1.15 Bus voltage of the
second fault Bus voltage of the last fault ●
y1.16 Input terminal status
of the second fault
Input terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI0 When the input terminal is ON, the corresponding binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI
status is converted to the decimal number for
display.
●
y1.17 Output terminal status of the second fault
Output terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
When the output terminal is ON, the corresponding binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI
status is converted to the decimal number for
display.
●
y1.18 Reserved
y1.19 Power-on time of the
second fault Current power-on time of the last fault ●
y1.20 Running time of the second fault
Current running time of the last fault ●
BIT4
BIT3
BIT2
BIT1
BIT0
SPB
REL1 Reserve
SPA
REL2
BIT4
BIT3
BIT2
BIT1
BIT0
SPB
REL1
Reserve
SPA
REL2
Chapter 5 Function parameter
133
y1.21 to
y1.22 Reserved
y1.23 Frequency of the first
fault Frequency of the last fault ●
y1.24 Current of the first fault
Current of the last fault ●
y1.25 Bus voltage of the first
fault Bus voltage of the last fault ●
y1.26 Input terminal status of the first fault
Input terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI0
When the input terminal is ON, the
corresponding binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI status is converted to the decimal number for
display.
●
y1.27 Output terminal status
of the first fault
Output terminal status of the last fault, the order is:
When the output terminal is ON, the
corresponding binary bits is 1, OFF is 0, all DI
status is converted to the decimal number for display.
●
y1.28 Reserved
y1.29 Power-on time of the
first fault Current power-on time of the last fault ●
y1.30 Running time of the first fault
Current running time of the last fault ●
BIT4
BIT3
BIT2
BIT1
BIT0
SPB
REL1
Reserve
SPA
REL2
134
第
十
章
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
PI9000 can provide effective protection when the equipment performance is played fully. The
following faults may appear in the process of use, please refer to the following table to analyze the
possible causes and then trouble shoot. In case of damage to the equipment and the reasons that can not solved, please contact with
your local dealers/agents, or directly contact with the manufacturers to seek solutions.
6-1.Fault alarm and countermeasures PI9000 can provide effective protection when the equipment performance is played fully. In
case of abnormal fault, the protection function will be invoked, the inverter will stop output, and
the faulty relay contact of the inverter will start, and the fault code will be displayed on the display
panel of the inverter. Before consulting the service department, user can perform self-check , analyze the fault cause and find out the solution according to the instructions of this chapter. If the
fault is caused by the reasons as described in the dotted frame, please consult the agents of inverter
or directly contact with our company.
No. Fault ID Failure type Possible causes Solutions
1 Err.01 Inverter unit
protection
1.the short circuit of inverter
output happens
2.the wiring for the motor and the inverter is too long
3.module overheating
4.the internal wiring of inverter is loose
5.the main control panel is
abnormal 6.the drive panel is abnormal.
7.the inverter module is abnormal
1.eliminate peripheral faults
2.additionally install the reactor or the output filter
3.check the air duct is
blocked or not and the fan is working normally or not,
and eliminate problems
4.correctly plug all cables 5.seek for technical support
2 Err.02 Acceleration
overcurrent
1.the acceleration time is too short 2.manual torque boost or V/F
curve is not suitable
3.the voltage is low 4.the short-circuit or earthing of
inverter output happens
5.the control mode is vector and without identification of
parameters
6.the motor that is rotating is started unexpectedly.
7.suddenly increase the load in the
process of acceleration.
8.the type selection of inverter is
small
1.increase acceleration time 2.adjust manual torque
boost or V/F curve
3.set the voltage to the normal range
4.eliminate peripheral faults
5.perform identification for the motor parameters
6.select Speed Tracking
Start or restart after stopping the motor.
7.cancel the sudden load
8.choose the inverter with
large power level
3 Err.03 Deceleration
overcurrent
1.the short-circuit or earthing of inverter output happens
2.the control mode is vector and
without identification of parameters
3.the deceleration time is too short
4.the voltage is low 5.suddenly increase the load in the
process of deceleration.
6.didn't install braking unit and
1.eliminate peripheral faults 2.perform identification for
the motor parameters
3.increase the deceleration time
4.set the voltage to the
normal range 5.cancel the sudden load
6.install braking unit and
brake resistor
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
135
braking resistor
4 Err.04 Constant speed
overcurrent
1.the short-circuit or earthing of inverter output happens
2.the control mode is vector and
without identification of parameters
3.the voltage is low
4, whether suddenly increase the load when running
5.the type selection of inverter is
small
1.eliminate peripheral faults
2.perform identification for
the motor parameters 3.set the voltage to the
normal range
4.cancel the sudden load 5.choose the inverter with
large power level
5 Err.05 Acceleration
overvoltage
1.didn't install braking unit and
braking resistor
2.the input voltage is high 3.there is external force to drag
the motor to run when
accelerating. 4.the acceleration time is too short
1.install braking unit and
brake resistor
2.set the voltage to the normal range
3.cancel the external force
or install braking resistor. 4.increase acceleration time
6 Err.06 Deceleration
overvoltage
1.the input voltage is high 2.there is external force to drag
the motor to run when
decelerating. 3.the deceleration time is too short
4.didn't install braking unit and
braking resistor
1.set the voltage to the
normal range
2.cancel the external force or install braking resistor.
3.increase the deceleration
time 4.install braking unit and
brake resistor
7 Err.07 Constant speed
overvoltage
1.there is external force to drag
the motor to run when running
2.the input voltage is high
1.cancel the external force or install braking resistor.
2.set the voltage to the
normal range
8 Err.08 Control power
failure
1.The range of input voltage is not
within the specification
2.Frequent reported under pressure failure
Adjust the voltage to the range of the requirements
of specification
9 Err.09 Under voltage
fault
1.the momentary power cut
2.the inverter's input voltage is
not within the specification 3.the bus voltage is not normal
4.the rectifier bridge and buffer
resistance are abnormal 5.the drive panel is abnormal.
6.the control panel is abnormal
1.reset fault 2.adjust the voltage to the
normal range
3.seek for technical support
10 Err.10 Inverter overload
1.the type selection of inverter is
small 2.whether the load is too large or
the motor stall occurs
1.choose the inverter with large power level
2.reduce the load and check
the motor and its mechanical conditions
11 Err.11 Motor Overload
1. power grid voltage is too low 2.whether the setting motor
protection parameters (F8.03) is
appropriate or not 3.whether the load is too large or
the motor stall occurs
1.check the power grid
voltage
2.correctly set this parameter.
3.reduce the load and check the motor and its
mechanical conditions
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
136
12 Err.12 Input phase loss
1.the drive panel is abnormal.
2.the lightning protection plate is
abnormal
3.the main control panel is abnormal
4.the three-phase input power is
not normal
1.replace the drive, the
power board or contactor
2.seek for technical support
3.check and eliminate the existing problems in the
peripheral line
13 Err.13 Output phase loss
1.the lead wires from the inverter to the motor is not normal
2.the inverter's three phase output
is unbalanced when the motor is running
3.the drive panel is abnormal.
4.the module is abnormal
1.eliminate peripheral faults
2.check the motor's three-
phase winding is normal or not and eliminate faults
3.seek for technical support
14 Err.14 Module
overheating
1.the air duct is blocked
2.the fan is damaged
3.the ambient temperature is too high
4.the module thermistor is
damaged 5.the inverter module is damaged
1.clean up the air duct
2.replace the fan
3.decrease the ambient temperature
4.replace the thermistor
5.replace the inverter module
15 Err.15 External
equipment fault
Input external fault signal through
the multi-function terminal DI Reset run
16 Err.16 Communication
fault
1.the communication cable is not normal
2.the settings for communication
expansion card F9.07 are incorrect
3.the settings for communication
parameters F9 group are incorrect 4.the host computer is not
working properly
1.check the communication cable
2.correctly set the
communications expansion card type
3.correctly set the
communication parameters 4.check the wiring of host
computer
17 Err.17 Contactor fault
1.input phase loss
2.the drive plate and the contact
are not normal
1.check and eliminate the existing problems in the
peripheral line
2.replace the drive, the power board or contactor
18 Err.18 Current detection
fault
1.check Hall device
2.the drive panel is abnormal.
1.replace the drive panel
2.replace hall device
19 Err.19 Motor parameter auto tunning fault
1.the motor parameters was not
set according to the nameplate 2.the identification process of
parameter is timeout
1.correctly set motor parameter according to the
nameplate
2.check the lead wire from the inverter to the motor
20 Err.20 Disk code fault
1.the encoder is damaged 2.PG card is abnormal
3.the encoder model does not
match 4.the encoder connection has error
1.replace the encoder
2.replace the PG card
3.correctly set the encoder model according to the
Actual conditions
4.eliminate the line fault
21 Err.21 EEPROM read
and write fault EEPROM chip is damaged
Replace the main control
panel
22 Err.22 Inverter hardware fault
1.overvoltage 2.overcurrent
1.eliminate overvoltage fault
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
137
2.eliminate overcurrent
fault
23 Err.23 Short-circuit to
ground fault Motor short to ground Replace the cable or motor
26 Err.26
Cumulative running time
arrival fault
Cumulative running time arrival
fault
Clear history information by using initialization
function parameters
27 Err.27 Custom fault 1
Input custom fault 1 signal
through the multi-function terminal DI
Reset run
28 Err.28 Custom fault 2
Input custom fault 2 signal
through the multi-function terminal DI
Reset run
29 Err.29 Total power-on
time arrival fault
Total power-on time reaches the
set value
Clear history information
by using initialization
function parameters
30 Err.30 Load drop fault The inverter running current is less than F8.31
Confirm whether the load is
removed or not or the
settings for parameter(F8.31, F8.32)
accord with the Actual
operating conditions
31 Err.31
PID feedback loss when
running fault
PID feedback is less than the set
value of E2.11
Check PID feedback signal or set E2.11 to an
appropriate value
40 Err.40 Quick current limiting fault
1.whether the load is too large or
the motor stall occurs 2.the type selection of inverter is
small
1.reduce the load and check the motor and its
mechanical conditions
2.choose the inverter with large power level
41 Err.41
Switch motor
when running fault
Change current motor through the
terminal when the inverter is running
Switch motor after the
inverter stops
42 Err.42 Too large speed deviation fault
1.the setting for Too Large Speed
Deviation parameters(F8.15,
F8.16) is unreasonable. 2.the setting for encoder
parameters is incorrect
3.the parameter was not identified
1.reasonably set the
detection parameters
2.correctly set encoder parameters
3.perform identification for
the motor parameters
43 Err.43 Motor over speed
fault
1.the parameter was not identified
2.the setting for encoder
parameters is incorrect
3.the setting for motor overspeed
detection parameter(F8.13, F8.14)
is unreasonable.
1.perform identification for
the motor parameters
2.correctly set encoder
parameters
3.reasonably set the
detection parameters
45 Err.45
Motor overtemperature
fault
1.the wiring of temperature sensor
is loose
2.the motor temperature is too high
1.detect the wiring of temperature sensor wiring
and eliminate fault.
2.decrease carrier frequency or take other cooling
measures to cool motor
51 Err.51 Initial position
error
the deviation between the motor parameters and the actual
parameters is too large
reconfirm the correct motor parameters, focus on
whether the rated current is
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
138
set to too small.
- COF Communication
failure
1 keyboard interface control
board;
2 keyboard lines or crystal connectors bad;
3 keyboard control panel or
hardware damage; 4 keyboard line is too long, the
scene caused by interference.
1, the detection of keyboard interface, control panel
interface is abnormal;
2, detect the keyboard line, crystal connector is
abnormal;
3, replace the control board or keyboard;
4, consulting
manufacturers, to seek help.
6-2. EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility)
6-2-1.Definition Electromagnetic compatibility refers to the ability that the electric equipment runs in an
electromagnetic interference environment and implements its function stably without interferences on the electromagnetic environment.
6-2-2.EMC standard In accordance with the requirements of the Chinese national standard GB12668.3, the inverter
must comply with the requirements of electromagnetic interference and anti- electromagnetic
interference.
Our existing products adopt the latest international standards: IEC/EN61800-3: 2004 (Adjpstable speed electrical Power drive systems Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test
methods), which is equivalent to the Chinese national standards GB12668.3. EC/EN61800-3
assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and anti-electronic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation interference, conduction interference and
harmonics interference on the inverter (necessary for civil inverter)
Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests the conduction immunity, radiation immunity, surge immunity, EFTB(Electrical Fast Transient Burs) immunity, ESD immunity and power low
frequency end immunity (the specific test items includes: 1. Immunity tests of input voltage sag,
interrupt and change; 2.commutation notch immunity; 3. harmonic input immunity ; 4. input frequency change; 5. input voltage unbalance; 6. input voltage fluctuation). The tests shall be
conducted strictly in accordance with the above requirements of IEC/EN61800-3, and our products
are installed and used according to the guideline of the Section 6-3 and can provide good electromagnetic compatibility in general industry environment.
6-3.EMC directive
6-3-1.Harmonic effect
The higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter. Thus, at some places where
the quality of power system is relatively poor, it is recommended to install AC input reactor.
6-3-2.Electromagnetic interference and installation precautions
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences, one is the interference from
electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment to the inverter, and the other is the
interference from the inverter to the surrounding equipments. Installation Precautions:
1) The earth wires of the Inverter and other electric products ca shall be well grounded;
2) The power cables of the inverter power input and output and the cable of weak current signal (e.g. control line) shall not be arranged in parallel but in vertical if possible.
3) It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter shall use shield cables or
steel pipe shielded cables and that the shielding layer shall be grounded reliably, the lead cables of the equipment suffering interferences shall use twisted-pair shielded control cables, and the
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
139
shielding layer shall be grounded reliably.
4) When the length of motor cable is longer than 50 meters, it needs to install output filter or
reactor.
6-3-3.Remedies for the interferences from the surrounding electromagnetic
equipments to the inverter
Generally the electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated by plenty of relays, contactors and electromagnetic brakes installed near the inverter. When the inverter has error action
due to the interferences, the following measures is recommended:
1) Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference; 2) Install filter at the input end of the inverter, please refer to Section 6.3.6 for the specific
operations.
3) The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line shall use the shielded cable and the shielding layer shall be grounded reliably.
6-3-4.Remedies for the interferences from the inverter to the surrounding
electromagnetic equipments
These noise interferences are classified into two types: one is the radiation interference of the
inverter, and the other is the conduction interference of the inverter. These two types of interferences cause that the surrounding electric equipments suffer from the affect of
electromagnetic or electrostatic induction. Further, the surrounding equipment produces error
action. For different interferences, please refer to the following remedies: 1) Generally the meters, receivers and sensors for measuring and testing have more weak
signals. If they are placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control
cabinet, they easily suffer from interference and thus generate error actions. It is recommended to handle with the following methods: away from the interference source as far as possible; do not
arrange the signal cables with the power cables in parallel and never bind them together; both the
signal cables and power cables shall use shielded cables and shall be well grounded; install ferrite magnetic ring (with suppressing frequency of 30 to 1, 000MHz) at the output side of the inverter
and wind it 2 to 3 turns; install EMC output filter in more severe conditions.
2) When the interfered equipment and the inverter use the same power supply, it may cause conduction interference. If the above methods cannot remove the interference, it shall install EMC
filter between the inverter and the power supply (refer to Section 6.3.6 for the selection operation); 3) The surrounding equipment shall be separately grounded, which can avoid the interference
caused by the leakage current of the inverter's grounding wire when common grounding mode is
adopted.
6-3-5.Remedies for leakage current
There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter. One is leakage current to the
earth, and the other is leakage current between the cables.
1) Factors of affecting leakage current to the earth and its solutions: There are the distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth. The larger the
distributed capacitance, the larger the leakage current; the distributed capacitance can be reduced
by effectively reducing the distance between the inverter and the motor. The higher the carrier frequency, the larger the leakage current. The leakage current can be redUced by reducing the
carrier frequency. However, the carrier frequency reduced may result in the increase of motor
noise.Please note that additional installation of reactor is also an effective method to solve leakage current problem.
The leakage current may increase with the increase of circuit current. Therefore, when the
motor power is higher, the corresponding leakage current will be higher too. 2) Factors of producing leakage current between the cables and its solutions:
There is the distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter. If the current
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting
140
passing lines has higher harmonic, it may cause resonance and thus result in leakage current. If the
thermal relay is used, it may generate error action.
The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor. It is recommended that
the thermal relay shall not be installed in the front of the motor when using the inverter, and that electronic over current protection function of the inverter shall be used instead.
6-3-6.Precautions on installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply
1) Note: when using the inverter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the filter belongs
to Classification I electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter and the metal ground of the installing cabinet shall be well earthed in a large area, and have good conduction continuity,
otherwise there may be danger of electric shock and the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
Through the EMC test, it is found that the filter ground end and the PE end of the inverter must be connected to the same public earth end, otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
2) The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as much as
possible.
141
第
十
章
Chapter 7 Dimensions
7-1.Dimensions
7-1-1.Appearance and installation holes size
Diagram 7-1 Appearance and installation holes size
PI9100 series
9S2 to 9S4
bW
a L
Hd
d
Diagram 7-2 9S2 to 9S4 dimensions
操作面板
上盖板
活动盖板
控制电缆入口
整机固定孔
防护密封片
安装位(可选)
普传变频器铭牌
风道进风口
Movable cover plate
Control cable inlet
Air duct inlet
Top cover plate
Operation panel
Sealing guard
mounting position
(optional)
Fixing holes
Nameplate
Chapter 7 Dimensions
142
9S2
Power supply level Type Power(kW) Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
1-phase 220V G 0.4 to 1.5
185 120 165 174 108 Ø5.3 3-phase 220V G 0.4 to 1.5
3-phase 380V G 0.75 to 2.2
9S3
Power supply level Type Power
(kW)
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
1-phase 220V G 2.2
220 150 182 209 138 Ø5.3 3-phase 220V G 2.2
3-phase 380V F 5.5
G 4.0 to 5.5
9S4
Power supply level Type Power
(kW)
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
1-phase 220V G 4.0
285 180 200 272 167 Ø5.5 3-phase 220V G 4.0
3-phase 380V F 7.5 to 11
G 7.5
PI9200 series
9L1 to 9L6
b H
W
aL
d
WARNING
Read instruction manual carefully before installation
and operation
High voltage inslde. Maintenance shorld be performed
by well-trained personel
Make sure to connect the ground terminal before
connecting orther terminals
Perform maintenance or inspection after the charge
LED turns off(fully discharged)
Diagram 7-3 9L1 to 9L6 dimensions
Chapter 7 Dimensions
143
9L1 Power supply
level Type Power(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
1-phase 220V G 5.5
9L1 360 220 225 340 150 Ø10 3-phase 380V
F 11 to 18.5
G 11 to 15
9L2
Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 22 to 30
9L2 435 275 258 415 165 Ø10 G 18.5 to 22
9L3
Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 37 to 45
9L3 480 296 262 460 200 Ø10 G 30 to 37
9L4
Power supply level Type Power (kW)
Base No. Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 55 to 93
9L4 660 364 295 640 250 Ø10 G 45 to 75
9L5 Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 110 to 132
9L5 710 453 295 690 350 Ø10 G 93 to 110
9L6 Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 160 to 187
9L6 910 480 335 890 350 Ø10 G 132 to 160
PI9300 series
9C1 to 9C3
L
HW
a
Diagram 7-4 9C1 to 9C3 dimensions
Chapter 7 Dimensions
144
9C1 Power supply
level Type Power(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 200 to 250
9C1 1300 600 395 550 280 Ø13 G 187 to 220
9C2
Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 200 to 250
9C2 1540 515 438 464.5 367 Ø13 G 187 to 220
9C3
Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW)
Base
No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 280 to 400
9C3 1700 850 485 640 260 Ø13 G 250 to 355
PI9400 series
9P4 to 9P7
b
W
aL
H
Diagram 7-5 9P4 to 9P7 dimensions
9P4
Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW)
Base
No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 55 to 75
9P4 620 360 312 600 250 Ø10 G 45 to 55
9P5 Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW)
Base
No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 93 to 110
9P5 680 420 335 660 250 Ø10 G 75 to 93
9P6 Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
Chapter 7 Dimensions
145
3-phase 380V F 132 to 187
9P6 750 475 335 730 350 Ø10 G 110 to 160
9P7 Power supply
level Type
Power
(kW) Base No.
Dimensions Installation size
L W H a b d
3-phase 380V F 200 to 250
9P7 1000 600 395 938 370 Ø14 G 187 to 220
Keyboard size diagram JP6E9100 size diagram:
Diagram 7-6 JP6E9100 size diagram(size unit:mm)
JPR6E9100 size diagram:
Diagram 7-7 JPR6E9100 size diagram(size unit:mm)
Chapter 7 Dimensions
146
JP6D9200 keyboard case size diagram:
Diagram 7-8 JP6D9200 size diagram(size unit:mm)
Install keyboard case on the panel, opening square hole isrequired:(76±0.1)*(123±0.1)
147
第
十
章
Chapter 8 Maintenance and repair
8-1.Inspection and Maintenance During normal use of the inverter, in addition to routine inspections, the regular inspections
are required (e.g. the overhaul or the specified interval, and the interval shall not exceed 6 months), please refer to the following table to implement the preventive measures.
Check Date Check
Points
Check
Items
Check to be
done Method Criterion
Routine Regular
√ Display LED
display
Whether display is
abnormal or not
Visually
check
As per
use status
√ √ Cooling system
Fan
Whether
abnormal noise or vibration
exists or not
Visually
and audibly
check
No abnormal
√ Body Surrounding
conditions
Temperature, humidity,
dust, harmful
gas.
Visually check with
smelling
and feeling
As per
Section 2-1
√ Input/output terminals
Voltage
Whether input/output
voltage is abnormal or
not
Test R, S,
T and U, V, W
terminals
As per
standard specification
s
√ Main circuit
Overall
Whether these
phenomenon of loose
fastenings,
overheat, discharging,
much dust, or
blocked air duct exist or not
Visually
check,
tighten and
clean
No
abnormal
Electrolytic
capacitance
Whether
appearance is
abnormal or not
Visually
check
No
abnormal
Wires and
conducting
bar
Whether they are loose or not
Visually check
No abnormal
Terminals
If screws or
bolts are loose
or not
Tighten No
abnormal
"√" means routine or regular check to be needed Do not disassemble or shake the device gratuitously during check, and never unplug the connectors, otherwise the system will not run or will enter into fault state and lead to component failure or even
damage to the main switching device such as IGBT module.
The different instruments may come to different measurement results when measuring. It is recommended that the pointer voltmeter shall be used for measuring input voltage, the rectifier
voltmeter for output voltage, the clamp-on ammeter for input current and output current, and the
electric wattmeter for power.
8-2.Parts for regular replacement
Chapter 8 Maintenance and repair
148
To ensure the reliable operation of inverter, in addition to regular care and maintenance, some
internal mechanical wear parts(including cooling fan, filtering capacitor of main circuit for energy
storage and exchange, and printed circuit board) shall be regularly replaced. Use and replacement
for such parts shall follow the provisions of below table, also depend on the specific application environment, load and current status of inverter.
Name of Parts Standard life time
Cooling fan 1 to 3 years
Filter capacitor 4 to 5 years
Printed circuit board(PCB) 5 to 8 years
8-3.Storage The following actions must be taken if the inverter is not put into use immediately(temporary
or long-term storage) after purchasing:
※ It should be store at a well-ventilated site without damp, dust or metal dust, and the ambient
temperature complies with the range stipulated by standard specification
※ Voltage withstand test can not be arbitrarily implemented, it will reduce the life of inverter.
Insulation test can be made with the 500-volt megger before using, the insulation resistance
shall not be less than 4MΩ.
8-4.Capacitor
8-4-1.Capacitor rebuilt
※ If the frequency inverter hasn‟t been used for a long time, before using it please rebuilt the
DC bus capacitor according the instruction. The storage time is counted from delivery.
Time Operation instruction
Less than 1 year No need to recharge
Between 1~2 years Before the first time to use, the frequency inverter must be recharged for one hour
Between 2~3years
Use adjustable power to charge the frequency inverter:
--25% rated power 30 minutes, -- 50% rated power 30minutes,
-- 75% rated power 30minutes,
--Last 100% rated power 30minutes,
More than 3 years
Use adjustable power to charge the frequency inverter: --25% rated power 2hours,
--50% rated power 2 hours,
-- 75% rated power 2hours, -- Last 100% rated power 2hours.
Instruction of using adjustable power to charge the frequency inverter:
The adjustable power is decided by the frequency inverter input power, for the single phase/3 phase 220v frequency inverter, we uase 220v AC/2A Regulator. Both single phase and three phase
frequency inverter can be charged by single phase Power Surge(L+ connect R,N connects T)
Because it is the same rectifier,so al l the DC bus capacitor will be charged at the same time.
You should make sure the voltage(380v) of high voltage frequency inverter, because when the
capacitor being charged it almost doesn‟t need any current, so small capacitor is enough(2A)
The instruction of using resisitor( incandescent lights) to charge frequency inverters: When charge the DC bus capacitor of drive system by connecting power directly, then the
time should not be less than 60 minutes. The operation should be carried on under the condition of
normal temperature and without load, and moreover ,should be added resistor in the power supply
cycle.
Chapter 8 Maintenance and repair
149
380V drive system: use 1K/100W resistor. When the power is less than 380v, 100w
incandescent lights is also suitable. When using incandescent lights, the lights will extinct or
become very weak.
VoltageAC 380V
Inverter
R
S
T
Diagram 8-1 380V Drive equipment charging circuit example
Measuring and readings If a general instrument is used to measure current, imbalance will exists for the current at the
input terminal. generally, the deviation is not more than 10%, that is normal. If the deviation exceeds 30%, please inform the original manufacturer to replace rectifier bridge, or check if the
deviation of three-phase input voltage is above 5V or not. If a general multi-meter is used to measure three-phase output voltage, the reading is not
accurate due to the interference of carrier frequency and it is only for reference.
150
第
十
章
Chapter 9 Options
User can additionally install peripheral devices based on the different application conditions
and requirements for this series of product, and its wiring diagram is as follows:
Three-phase AC power
Please use the power supply meeting
the specifications of the inverter.
Molded case circuit breaker
(MCCB) or earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB)
When the power is on, the inverter will
receive a great impact on current, the
proper selection of breaker is very
important.
Input side
Noise filter(optional)
Output side
Noise filter(optional)
Braking resistor
(optional)
Braking unit
DC reactor(9300 series
DC reactor is standard
accessories)
To prevent electricshock, the motor andthe inverter must bewell grounded
Connect
to ground
AC output reactor(optional)
Motor
Connect to
ground
AC contactor
AC Input reactor(optional)
Diagram 9-1 Option wiring diagram
Chapter 9 Options
151
9-1. Expansion card If the extended function (such as RS485 card, PG card, etc.)for other functional modules is
needed, please specify the functional module card you want when ordering.
9-2. Input AC choke AC input reactor can inhibit high harmonics of the inverter input current,significantly
improving power factor of the inverter. It is recommended that AC input reactor should be used in
the following cases. The ratio of the capability of power supply used for the inverter to the inverter own capability
is more than 10:1.
The thyristor load or the device of power-factor compensation with ON/OFF is connected with the same power supply.
The degree of unbalance for three-phase power supply voltage is larger (≥ 3%).
Dimensions for common specifications of input AC choke are as follows:
U V W
X Y Zd
a
L
H
b
W
Diagram 9-2 Dimensions for Input AC choke
9-2-1.Input AC choke
No. Model Power
(kW)
Rated
Current
(A)
Net
weight
(kg)
Voltage
drop
(V)
Inducta
nce
(mH)
Installation size
a/b/d(mm)
380V voltage levels
1 ACL-0005-EISC-E3M8B 1.5 5 2.48 2.00% 2.8 91/65/6*11
2 ACL-0007-EISC-E2M5B 2.2 7 2.58 2.00% 2.0 91/65/6*11
3 ACL-0010-EISC-E1M5B 4.0 10 2.67 2.00% 1.4 91/65/6*11
4 ACL-0015-EISH-E1M0B 5.5 15 3.45 2.00% 0.93 95/61/6*15
5 ACL-0020-EISH-EM75B 7.5 20 3.25 2.00% 0.7 95/61/6*15
6 ACL-0030-EISCL-EM47 11 30 5.13 2.00% 0.47 120/72/8.5*20
7 ACL-0040-EISCL-EM35 15 40 5.20 2.00% 0.35 120/72/8.5*20
8 ACL-0050-EISCL-EM28 18.5 50 6.91 2.00% 0.28 120/72/8.5*20
9 ACL-0060-EISCL-EM24 22 60 7.28 2.00% 0.24 120/72/8.5*20
10 ACL-0090-EISCL-EM16 37 90 7.55 2.00% 0.16 120/72/8.5*20
Chapter 9 Options
152
11 ACL-0120-EISCL-EM12 45 120 10.44 2.00% 0.12 120/92/8.5*20
12 ACL-0150-EISH-EM11B 55 150 14.8 2.00% 0.095 182/76/11*18
13 ACL-0200-EISH-E80UB 75 200 19.2 2.00% 0.07 182/96/11*18
14 ACL-0250-EISH-E65UB 110 250 22.1 2.00% 0.056 182/96/11*18
15 ACL-0290-EISH-E50UB 132 290 28.3 2.00% 0.048 214/100/11*18
16 ACL-0330-EISH-E50UB 160 330 28.3 2.00% 0.042 214/100/11*18
17 ACL-0390-EISH-E44UB 185 390 31.8 2.00% 0.036 243/112/12*20
18 ACL-0490-EISH-E35UB 220 490 43.6 2.00% 0.028 243/122/12*20
19 ACL-0530-EISH-E35UB 240 530 43.6 2.00% 0.026 243/122/12*20
20 ACL-0005-EISC-E3M8B 1.5 5 2.48 2.00% 2.8 91/65/6*11
21 ACL-0600-EISH-E25UB 280 600 52 2.00% 0.023 243/137/12*20
22 ACL-0660-EISH-E25UB 300 660 52 2.00% 0.021 243/137/12*20
23 ACL-0800-EISH-E25UB 380 800 68.5 2.00% 0.0175 260/175/12*20
24 ACL-1000-EISH-E14UB 450 1000 68.5 2.00% 0.014 260/175/12*20
25 ACL-1200-EISH-E11UB 550 1250 106 2.00% 0.0011 275/175/12*20
26 ACL-1600-EISH-E12UB 630 1600 110 2.00% 0.0087 275/175/12*20
690V voltage levels
1. ACL-0015-EISA-E1M7 15 15 5.5 2.00% 1.7 95/80/6*15
2. ACL-0025-EISA-E1M0 22 25 7 2.00% 1.05 120/72/8.5*20
3. ACL-0035-EISA-EM73 37 35 9 2.00% 0.73 120/92/8.5*20
4. ACL-0055-EISA-EM46 45 55 10.5 2.00% 0.465 120/92/8.5*20
5. ACL-0070-EISA-EM36 55 70 16.5 2.00% 0.365 120/127/8.5*20
6. ACL-0090-EISA-EM28 75 90 21 2.00% 0.285 182/88/11*18
7. ACL-0125-EISA-EM20 90 125 23.5 2.00% 0.2 182/101/11*18
8. ACL-0160-EISA-EM16 110/132 160 27 2.00% 0.16 182/111/11*18
9. ACL-0200-EISA-EM12 160 200 30 2.00% 0.125 214/100/11*18
10. ACL-0250-EISA-EM10 220 250 35 2.00% 0.105 214/125/11*18
11. ACL-0300-EISA-E85U 250 300 41 2.00% 0.085 243/119/12*20
12. ACL-0400-EISA-E65U 315/355 400 47 2.00% 0.065 243/134/12*20
13. ACL-0500-EISA-E65U 450 500 53 2.00% 0.05 243/144/12*20
14. ACL-0650-EISA-E40U 500/560 650 60 2.00% 0.04 225/175/15*25
15. ACL-0800-EISA-E32U 630/750 800 80 2.00% 0.032 225/175/15*25
16. ACL-0950-EISA-E27U 800 950 89 2.00% 0.027 225/175/15*25
Chapter 9 Options
153
17. ACL-1200-EISA-E21U 900/1000 1200 100 2.00% 0.021 225/200/15*25
9-3. Output AC choke 在变频器的输出侧是否要配置交流输出电抗器,可根据具体情况而定。变频器与电机
之间的传输线不宜太长,线缆过长,其分布电容就越大,容易产生高次谐波电流。
当输出电缆过长时应配置输出电抗器。当线缆长度大于或等于下表中的值时,须在变
频器附近加装交流输出电抗器。下表配置电抗输出电缆长度最小值
9-3-1.Output AC choke
No. Model Power
(kW)
Rated
Current
(A)
Net
weight
(kg)
Voltage
drop
(V)
Inducta
nce
(mH)
Installation size
a/b/d (mm)
380V voltage levels
1 OCL-0005-EISC-E1M4 1.5 5 3.48 1.00% 1.4 91/65/6*11
2 OCL-0007-EISC-E1M0 2.2 7 2.54 1.00% 1 91/65/6*11
3 OCL-0010-ELSC-EM70 4.0 10 2.67 1.00% 0.7 91/65/6*11
4 OCL-0015-ELSC-EM47 5.5 15 3.45 1.00% 0.47 95/61/6*15
5 OCL-0020-ELSC-EM35 7.5 20 3.25 1.00% 0.35 95/616*15
6 OCL-0030-ELSC-EM23 11 30 5.5 1.00% 0.23 95/818.5*20
7 OCL-0040-ELSC-EM18 15 40 5.5 1.00% 0.18 95/81/8.5*20
8 OCL-0050-ELSC-EM14 18.5 50 5.6 1.00% 0.14 95/81/8.5*20
9 OCL-0060-ELSC-EM12 22 60 5.8 1.00% 0.12 120/72/8.5*20
10 OCL-0080-ELSC-E87U 30 80 6.0 1.00% 0.087 120/72/8.5*20
11 OCL-0090-ELSC-E78U 37 90 6.0 1.00% 0.078 120/72/8.5*20
12 OCL-0120-ELSC-FbU 45 120 9.6 1.00% 0.058 120/92/8.5*20
13 OCL-0150-EISH-E47U 55 150 15 1.00% 0.047 182/87/11*18
14 OCL-0200-EISH-E35U 75 200 17.3 1.00% 0.035 182/97/11*18
15 OCL-0250-EISH-E28U 110 250 17.8 1.00% 0.028 182/97/11*18
16 OCL-0290-EISH-E24U 132 290 24.7 1.00% 0.024 214/101/11*18
17 OCL-0330-EISH-E21U 160 330 26 1.00% 0.021 214/106/11*18
18 OCL-0390-EISH-E18U 185 390 26.5 1.00% 0.018 214/106/11*18
19 OCL-0490-EISH-E14U 220 490 36.6 1.00% 0.014 243/113/12*20
20 OCL-0530-EISH-E13U 240 530 36.6 1.00% 0.013 243/113/12*20
21 OCL-0600-EISH-E12U 280 600 43.5 1.00% 0.012 243/128/12*20
22 OCL-0660-EISH-E4F0 300 660 44 1.00% 0.011 243/128/12*20
23 OCL-0800-EISH-FbF0 380 800 60.8 1.00% 0.0087 260/175/12*20
24 OCL-1000-EISH-E4F0 450 1000 61.5 1.00% 0.007 260/175/12*20
25 OCL-1200-EISH-E4F0 550 1200 89 1.00% 0.0058 275/175/12*20
Chapter 9 Options
154
26 OCL-1600-EISH-E3F0 630 1600 92 1.00% 0.0043 275/175/12*20
690V voltage levels
1. OCL-0015-EISA-EM85 15 15 - 1.00% 0.85 120/72/8.5*20
2. OCL-0025-EISA-EM51 22 25 - 1.00% 0.51 120/72/8.5*20
3. OCL-0035-EISA-EM36 37 35 - 1.00% 0.36 120/85/8.5*20
4. OCL-0055-EISA-EM23 45 55 - 1.00% 0.23 120/107/8.5*20
5. OCL-0070-EISA-EM18 55 70 - 1.00% 0.182 182/79/11*18
6. OCL-0090-EISA-EM14 75 90 - 1.00% 0.142 182/89/11*18
7. OCL-0125-EISA-EM10 90 125 - 1.00% 0.1 182/106/11*18
8. OCL-0160-EISA-E80U 110/132 160 - 1.00% 0.08 214/100/11*18
9. OCL-0200-EISA-E64U 160 200 - 1.00% 0.064 214/105/11*18
10. OCL-0250-EISA-E50U 220 250 - 1.00% 0.05 214/125/11*18
11. OCL-0300-EISA-E42U 250 300 - 1.00% 0.042 243/129/12*20
12. OCL-0400-EISA-E32U 315/355 400 - 1.00% 0.032 243/144/12*20
13. OCL-0500-EISA-E25U 450 500 - 1.00% 0.025 243/149/12*20
14. OCL-0650-EISA-E20U 500/560 650 - 1.00% 0.02 225/150/15*25
15. OCL-0800-EISA-E16U 630/750 800 - 1.00% 0.016 225/175/15*25
16. OCL-0950-EISA-E13U 800 950 - 1.00% 0.013 225/175/15*25
17. OCL-1200-EISA-E10U 900/1000 1200 - 1.00% 0.01 225/200/15*25
DC choke
No. Model Power
(kW)
Rated
Current
(A)
Net
weight
(kg)
Inducta
nce
(mH)
Installation size
a/b/d (mm)
380V voltage levels
1 DCL-0003-EIDC-E28M 0.4 3 1.5 28 63/47/5.4*9
2 DCL-0003-EIDC-E28M 0.8 3 1.5 28 63/47/5.4*9
3 DCL-0006-EIDC-E11M 1.5 6 2.3 11 63/60/5.4*9
4 DCL-0006-EIDC-E11M 2.2 6 2.3 11 63/60/5.4*9
5 DCL-0012-EIDC-E6M3 4.0 12 3.2 6.3 80/70/6*11
6 DCL-0023-EIDH-E3M6 5.5 23 3.8 3.6 87/70/6*11
7 DCL-0023-EIDH-E3M6 7.5 23 3.8 3.6 87/70/6*11
8 DCL-0033-EIDH-E2M0 11 33 4.3 2 87/70/6*11
9 DCL-0033-EIDH-E2M0 15 33 4.3 2 87/70/6*11
10 DCL-0040-EIDH-E1M3 18.5 40 4.3 1.3 87/70/6*11
Chapter 9 Options
155
11 DCL-0050-EIDH-E1M1 22 50 5.5 1.08 95/85/8.4*13
12 DCL-0065-EIDH-EM80 30 65 7.2 0.8 111/85/8.4*13
13 DCL-0078-EIDH-EM70 37 78 7.5 0.7 111/85/8.4*13
14 DCL-0095-EIDH-EM54 45 95 7.8 0.54 111/85/8.4*13
15 DCL-0115-EIDH-EM45 55 115 9.2 0.45 125/90/9*18
16 DCL-0160-UIDH-EM36 75 160 10 0.36 100/98/9*18
17 DCL-0180-UIDH-EM33 93 180 20 0.33 100/98/9*18
18 DCL-0250-UIDH-EM26 110 250 23 0.26 176/115/11*18
19 DCL-0250-UIDH-EM26 132 250 23 0.26 176/115/11*18
20 DCL-0340-UIDH-EM17 160 340 23 0.17 176/115/11*18
21 DCL-0460-UIDH-EM09 185 460 28 0.09 191/115/11*18
22 DCL-0460-UIDH-EM09 220 460 28 0.09 191/115/11*18
23 DCL-0650-UIDH-E72U 300 650 33 0.072 206/125/11*18
Input filter
No. Model Voltage
(V)
Power
(kW)
Current
(A)
Net
weight
(kg)
Dimensions
L/W/H
(mm)
Installation size
a/b/d(mm)
1 YX82G2-5A-S 380 0.75~1.5 5 0.54 100/105/40 50/95/Φ4.5*6.5
2 YX82G2-10A-S 380 2.2~4 10 0.55 100/105/40 50/95/Φ4.5*6.5
3 YX82G5D-20A-S 380 5.5~7.5 16 1.6 185/105/60 167.8/85/Φ6.5*9.2
4 YX82G5D-36A-S 380 11~15 36 1.8 185/105/60 167.8/85/Φ6.5*9.2
5 YX82G5D-50A-S 380 18.5~22 45 1.6 185/105/60 167.8/85/Φ6.5*9.2
6 YX82G6D-65A-S 380 30 65 - 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
7 YX82G6D-80A-S 380 37 80 6.3 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
8 YX82G6D-100A-S 380 45 100 6.4 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
9 YX82G6D-120A-S 380 55 120 7.4 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
10 YX82G7D-150A-S 380 75 150 8.9 352/185/112 325/151/Φ8.5*14
11 YX82G7D-200A-S 380 93 200 - 352/185/112 325/151/Φ8.5*14
12 YX82G8-400A-B 380 200 300 12 380/220/155 228/195/Φ12
13 YX82G2-5A-S 380 0.75~1.5 5 0.54 100/105/40 50/95/Φ4.5*6.5
Output filter
No. Model Voltage
(V)
Power
(kW)
Current
(A)
Net
weight
(kg)
Dimensions
L/W/H
(mm)
Installation size
a/b/d(mm)
1 YX82G2-5A-SL 380 0.75~1.5 5 0.5 100/105/40 50/95/Φ4.5*6.5
2 YX82G2-10A-SL 380 2.2~4 10 0.55 185/105/60 50/95/Φ4.5*6.5
Chapter 9 Options
156
3 YX82G5D-20A-
SL 380 5.5~7.5 20 1.6 185/105/60 167.8/85/Φ6.5*9.2
4 YX82G5D-36A-
SL 380 11~15 36 1.8 185/105/60 167.8/85/Φ6.5*9.2
5 YX82G5D-50A-
SL 380 18.5~22 50 1.7 185/105/60 167.8/85/Φ6.5*9.2
6 YX82G6D-65A-
SL 380 30 65 6.2 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
7 YX82G6D-80A-
SL 380 37 80 6.2 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
8 YX82G6D-100A-
SL 380 45 100 6.5 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
9 YX82G6D-120A-
SL 380 55 150 6.5 310/170/107 280/142.5/Φ8.5*14
10 YX82G7D-150A-
SL 380 75 200 9.2 352/185/112 325/151/Φ8.5*14
11 YX82G7D-200A-
SL 380 93 250 - 352/185/112 325/151/Φ8.5*14
12 YX82G8D-300A-
BL 380 110 300 11.5 380/220/155 228/195/Φ12
13 YX82G8D-400A-
BL 380 200 400 11.6 380/220/155 228/195/Φ12
14 YX82G9D-630A-
BL 380 280~315 630 18.5 448/255/162 290/230/Φ12
Braking unit and braking resistor Frequency inverter PI9000 series: 220V 7.5kW and below models & 380V 15kW and below
models, there is built-in braking unit, the maximum braking torque is 50%. Refer the table below to
match the braking resistors. 220V 11kW and above models & 380V 18.5kW and above models need external braking unit if braking function required. Please select POWTRAN braking unit and
resistor models according to the specific site conditions.
1. 220V 7.5kW and below models & 380V 15kW and below models(there is built-in braking
unit),refer the table below to match the braking resistors:
Inverter
specifications Power of inverter(kW)
Resistance of braking
resistor(Ω)
Power of braking
resistor(W)
220V
0.75 200 120
1.5 100 300
2.2 70 300
4 40 500
5.5 30 500
7.5 20 780
380V
0.75 750 120
1.5 400 300
2.2 250 300
4 150 500
5.5 100 500
7.5 75 780
11 50 1000
Chapter 9 Options
157
15 40 1500
2. 220V 11kW and above models, refer the table below to match the external braking unit
and braking resistors:
Power of
inverter(kW)
Braking unit Braking resistor(the braking
torque is 150%)
Spec. Quantity(pcs) Spec. Quantity(pcs)
11 PB6012
1 13.6Ω/2400W 1
15 1 10Ω/3000W 1
18.5
PB6022
1 8Ω/4800W 1
22 1 6.8Ω/4800W 1
30 1 5Ω/6000W 1
37 1 5Ω/6000W 1
45 PB6032
1 3.4Ω/9600W 1
55 1 3.4Ω/9600W 1
75 PB6032 2 5Ω/6000W 2
93 PB6032
3 5Ω/6000W 3
110 3 5Ω/6000W 3
3. 380V 18.5kW and above models, refer the table below to match the external braking unit
and braking resistors:
Power of
inverter(kW)
Braking unit Braking resistor(the braking
torque is 150%)
Spec. Quantity(pcs) Spec. Quantity(pcs)
18.5 PB6014
1 32Ω/4800W 1
22 1 27.2Ω/4800W 1
30
PB6024
1 20Ω/6000W 1
37 1 16Ω/9600W 1
45 1 13.6Ω/9600W 1
55 1 10Ω/12000W 1
75
PB6034
1 6.8Ω/12000W 1
93 1 6.8Ω/12000W 1
110 1 6.8Ω/12000W 1
132 PB6034
2 6.8Ω/12000W 2
160 2 6.8Ω/12000W 2
187 PB6034
3 6.8Ω/12000W 3
220 3 6.8Ω/12000W 3
Specifications of circuit breakers, contactors and cables 9-8-1. Specifications of circuit breakers
MCCB or ELCB as the power switch of the inverter also plays a protective role to the power
supply.Note:do not use MCCB or ELCB to control start/stop of the inverter.
9-8-2.Contacors It‟s used to cut off power supply to prevent the failure to be expanded when the protection
function of the system is activated.The contactor can not be used to control the stop/start of the motor.
Model Circuit
breaker(A)
Input line/output line
(Copper cable) mm2
Rated operational current A of
contactor (voltage 380V or 220V)
R40G2 10A 1.5 10
R75G2 16A 2.5 10
1R5G2 20A 2.5 16
2R2G2 32A 4 20
Chapter 9 Options
158
004G2 40A 6 25
5R5G2 63A 6 32
7R5G2 100A 10 63
011G2 125A 10 95
015G2 160A 25 120
018G2 160A 25 120
022G2 200A 25 170
030G2 200A 35 170
037G2 250A 35 170
045G2 250A 70 230
055G2 315A 70 280
R75G3 10A 1.5 10
1R5G3 16A 1.5 10
2R2G3 16A 2.5 10
004G3 25A 2.5 16
5R5G3 25A 4 16
7R5G3 40A 4 25
011G3 63A 6 32
015G3 63A 6 50
018G3 100A 10 63
022G3 100A 16 80
030G3 125A 16 95
037G3 160A 25 120
045G3 200A 35 135
055G3 250A 35 170
075G3 315A 70 230
093G3 400A 95 280
110G3 400A 95 315
132G3 400A 95 380
160G3 630A 150 450
187G3 630A 185 500
200G3 630A 240 580
220G3 800A 120x2 630
250G3 800A 120x2 700
280G3 1000A 150x2 780
Chapter 9 Options
159
315G3 1200A 185x2 900
355G3 1280A 185x2 960
400G3 1380A 150x3 1035
500G3 1720A 185x3 1290
9-8-3.Power Cables 1. Power cable
The size of input power cable and motor cable should meet the local standard:
·Input power cable and the motor cable must bear the overload current.
·The highest rated temperature of motor cable should not be lower than 70℃ while constant
working.
·The conductivity of PE earth conductor and phase conductor are the same(adopt the same section surface).
·Regarding the requirement of EMC, please refer the “EMC instruction”
In order to meet the CE requirement to EMC, it must adopt symmetry shielding motor
cable(refer the below diagram). Regarding the input cable we can adopt the four-core cable, but we
recommend the shielding symmetry cable. Comparing with the four-core cable, shielding symmetry cable can not only reduce the motor cable over current and the damage, but also reduce
the electromagnetic radiation.
PE Conductor
Shielding
Conductor
Coverings
Insulated
Shielding
PE
Shielding Symmetry Motor Cable Four-core Cable
Conductor Conductor PE
Coverings
Insulated Insulated
Coverings
Cautions: If the motor cable shielding electricity conductivity function can not meet the
requirement, PE conductor should be adopted separately. In order to protect the conductor, when the shielding cable and the conductor are the same
material, shielding cable section surface and the phase conductor are the same, so that it can reduce
the resistor, and keep the impedance continuity better. In order to reduce the radio frequency immunity emitting and conducting, the shielding
electricity conductivity function must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor electricity
conductivity. Regarding the copper or aluminum shielding ,this is easy to meet. The lowest requirement for frequency inverter motor cable is as below. The cable is including spiral copper
tape. The tighter the better, because it can reduce the electromagnetic radiation.
Insulated Covering Shielding Covering
Cable Surface
2.Control cable
All of the analog control cable and the frequency input cable must adopt the shielding cable.
Chapter 9 Options
160
Analog signal cable twisted-pair screened cable refer the diagram 1.Every signal adopts one
separate twisted-pair. Different analog use different earth cable.
161
第
十
章
Chapter 10 Warranty
The product quality shall comply with the following provisions:
1. Warranty terms
1-1. The product from the user the date of purchase, the warranty period of 18 months
(except non-standard products)
1-2. The product from the user the purchase date, enjoy lifelong compensable service. If
there is agreement, take the priority to obey the agreement
2. Exceptions clause
If belongs to the quality problems caused by following reasons products, you will be
charged for maintenance fees even the products are still within the warranty.
2-1. The user is not in accordance with the "products manual" is used method of
operation caused the failure.
2-2. Users without permission to repair or alteration caused by product failure.
2-3. Users beyond the standard specifications require the use of the inverter caused by
product failure.
2-4. Users to buy and then fell loss or damage caused by improper handling.
2-5. Failure caused by user‟s bad environment (Such as: the environment is humid, dust
or acid-base corrosion of gas)
2-6. Due to the fault cause of earthquake, fire, lightning, wind or water disaster,
abnormal voltage irresistible natural disasters.
2-7. Damaged during shipping, and client didn‟t refuse it.
3. The following conditions, manufacturers have the right not to be warranty
3-1. No product nameplate or product nameplate blurred beyond recognition.
3-2. Not according to the purchase contract agreement to pay the money.
3-3. For installation, wiring, operation, maintenance and other users can not describe the
objective reality to the company's technical service center.
4. In return, replacement, repair service, you shall contact with our technical service center
firstly, or we refuse the service.
5. Regarding the maintenance fees, all needs to refer our new price list
6. When there is failure, please fill the warranty card correctly.
7. The right of explanation is owned by Dalian Powtran Technology
162
第
十
章
Appendix I RS485 Communication protocol
I-1 Communication protocol I-1-1 Communication content
This serial communication protocol defines the transmission information and use format in the
series communication Including: master polling( or broadcast) format; master encoding method,
and contents including: function code of action, transferring data and error checking. The response of slave also adopts the same structure, and contents including: action confirmation, returning the
data and error checking etc. If slave takes place the error while it is receiving information or cannot
finish the action demanded by master, it will send one fault signal to master as a response. Application Method
The inverter will be connected into a “Single-master Multi-slave” PC/PLC control network
with RS485 bus.
Bus structure
(1) Interface mode
RS485 hardware interface (2) Transmission mode
Asynchronous series and half-duplex transmission mode. For master and slave, only one of
them can send the data and the other only receives the data at the same time. In the series asynchronous communication, the data is sent out frame by frame in the form of message
(3) Topological structure
Single-master and multi-slave system. The setting range of slave address is 0 to 247, and 0 refers to broadcast communication address. The address of slave for network must be exclusive.
I-1-2 Communications connection Installation of RS485 communication module:
Diagram I-1:9K-RS485_S connect to 9KLCB control board
Appendix I
163
Diagram I-2:9K-RS485_S connect to 9KSCB control board
Single application:
Picture I-3 , the MODBUS wiring diagram of single inverter and PC. Generally , because PC
does not carry RS485 interface, So we need to change the RS232 interface or USB interface in PC to RS485 through coverter . Connect the A terminal of RS485 to 485+ terminal on terminal
board ,and connect the B terminal of RS485 to 485- terminal on terminal board. It is better to use twisted-pair cable with shield for the connection. When using the RS232-485 converter, the cable
between RS232 interface on PC and RS232 interface on RS232-RS485 converter should be short,
not longer than 15m.The best way is to insert the RS232-RS485 converter on the PC. When using the USB-RS485 converter, the cable should be short too.
When all cable is in right position, choose the right terminal on PC, the terminal for
connecting RS232-RS485 converter, such as COM1, and set the basic parameters such as baud rate and data validation according to the inverter communication parameters.
Remark: 9KRSCB.V5/9KRLCB.V5 and above is built in with 485 card, the terminals are
485+ and 485-,converter t+ connect with 485+ terminal, T- connect with 485- terminal
Diagram I-3:Single application schematic diagram
Multiple Applications There are two connection ways for multiple application.
Connection 1,connect a 120Ω 1/4 W terminal resistor on both side. Shown as picture I-4
Appendix I
164
Diagram I-4:Multiple applications schematic diagram
Connection 2, connect a 120Ω 1/4W terminal resistor on two devices(5# and 8#)which are
farthest from the wire.Shown as picture I-5
RS232 to RS485 converter
T+
T-
SG-
SG+
SG-
SG+
SG-
SG+
1#
2#
8#
RS232
cable
length 15mSG-
SG+
5#
Inverter Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Diagram I-5:Multiple applications schematic diagram
It is better to use shield cable for the multiple application. And make the basic parameters
such as baud rate and data validation connecting with RS485 consistent , do not use one address repeatedly.
I-1-3 Protocol description PI9000 series inverter communication protocol is a asynchronous serial master-slave
communication protocol, in the network, only one equipment(master) can build a protocol (known as “Inquiry/Command”). Other equipment(slave) only can response the "Inquiry/Command"of
master by providing data or perform the corresponding action according to the
"Inquiry/Command"of master. Here, the master refers to a Personnel Computer(PC), an industrial control device or a programmable logic controller (PLC), etc. and the slave refers to PI9000
inverter. Master can communicate with individUal slave, also send broadcasting information to all
the lower slaves. For the single "Inquiry/Command"of master, slave will return a signal(that is a
response) to master; for the broadcasting information sent by master, slave does not need to
feedback a response to master.
Communication data structure PI9000 series inverter's Modbus protocol communication data format is as follows: in RTU mode, messages are sent at a silent interval of at least 3.5 characters.
There are diverse character intervals under network baud rate,
which is easiest implemented. The first field transmitted is the device address. The allowable characters for transmitting are hexadecimal 0 ... 9, A ... F. The networked
devices continuously monitor network bus, including during the silent intervals. When the first
field (the address field) is received, each device decodes it to find out if it is sent to their own. Following the last transmitted character, a silent interval of at least 3.5 characters marks the end of
the message. A new message can begin after this silent interval.
The entire message frame must be transmitted as a continuous stream. If a silent interval of
Appendix I
165
more than 1.5 characters occurs before completion of the frame, the receiving device will flushes
the incomplete message and assumes that the next byte will be the address field of a new message.
Similarly, if a new message begins earlier than the interval of 3.5 characters following a previous
message, the receiving device will consider it as a continuation of the previous message. This will result in an error, because the value in the final CRC field is not right.
RTUframe format :
Frame header START Time interval of 3.5characters
Slave address ADR Communication address: 1 to 247
Command code CMD 03: read slave parameters;06: write slave parameters
Data content DATA(N-1)
Data content: address of function code parameter, numbers of
function code parameter, value of function code parameter, etc.
Data content DATA(N-2)
………………………
Data content DATA0
CRC CHK high-order Detection Value: CRC value.
CRC CHK low-order
END Time interval of 3.5characters
CMD (Command) and DATA (data word description)
Command code: 03H, reads N words (max.12 words), for example: for the inverter with slave
address 01, its start address F0.02 continuously reads two values.
Master command information
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Start address high-order F0H
Start address low-order 02H
Number of registers high-order
00H
Number of registers low-
order
02H
CRC CHK low-order CRC checksum
CRC CHK high-order
Slave responding information
When F9.05 is set to 0:
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Byte number high-order 00H
Byte number low-order 04H
Data F002H high-order 00H
Data F002H low-order 00H
Data F003H high-order 00H
Data F003H low-order 01H
CRC CHK low-order CRC checksum
CRC CHK high-order
When F9.05is set to 1:
ADR 01H
CMD 03H
Byte number 04H
Data F002H high-order 00H
Data F002H low-order 00H
Data F003H high-order 00H
Appendix I
166
Data F003H low-order 01H
CRC CHK low-order CRC checksum
CRC CHK high-order
Command Code: 06H, write a word. For example:Write 5000(1388H)into the address F00AH
of the inverter with slave address 02H. Master command information
ADR 02H
CMD 06H
Data address high-order F0H
Data address low-order 13H
Data content high-order 13H
Data content low-order 88H
CRC CHK low-order CRC checksum
CRC CHK high-order
Slave responding information
ADR 02H CMD 06H Data address high-order F0H Data address low-order 13H Data content high-order 13H Data content low-order 88H CRC CHK low-order
CRC checksum CRC CHK high-order
I-2 Check mode: Check mode - CRC mode: CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) adopts RTU frame format, the
message includes an error-checking field that is based on CRC method. The CRC field checks the
whole content of message. The CRC field has two bytes containing a 16-bit binary value. The CRC
value calculated by the transmitting device will be added into to the message. The receiving device
recalculates the value of the received CRC, and compares the calculated value to the Actual value of the received CRC field, if the two values are not equal, then there is an error in the transmission.
The CRC firstly stores 0xFFFF and then calls for a process to deal with the successive eight-
bit bytes in message and the value of the current register. Only the 8-bit data in each character is valid to the CRC, the start bit and stop bit, and parity bit are invalid.
During generation of the CRC, each eight-bit character is exclusive OR(XOR) with the
register contents separately, the result moves to the direction of least significant bit(LSB), and the most significant bit(MSB) is filled with 0. LSB will be picked up for detection, if LSB is 1, the
register will be XOR with the preset value separately, if LSB is 0, then no XOR takes place. The
whole process is repeated eight times. After the last bit (eighth) is completed, the next eight-bit byte will be XOR with the register's current value separately again. The final value of the register
is the CRC value that all the bytes of the message have been applied.
When the CRC is appended to the message, the low byte is appended firstly, followed by the high byte. CRC simple functions is as follows:
unsigned int crc_chk_value(unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char length)
{ unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF;
int i;
while(length--)
{
crc_value^=*data_value++;
Appendix I
167
for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{
if(crc_value&0x0001)
{
c r c _ v a l u e = ( c r c _ v a l u e > > 1 )^0xa001;
}
else
{
crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
}
return(crc_value);
}
I-3 Definition of communication parameter address The section is about communication contents, it‟s used to control the operation, status and
related parameter settings of the inverter. Read and write function-code parameters (Some
functional code is not changed, only for the manufacturer use or monitoring): the rules of labeling
function code parameters address: The group number and label number of function code is used to indicate the parameter address:
High byte: F0 to Fb (F group), A0 to AF (E group), B0 to BF(B group),C0 to C7(Y group),70
to 7F (d group) low byte: 00 to FF For example: address F3.12 indicates F30C; Note: L0 group parameters: neither read nor
change; d group parameters: only read, not change.
Some parameters can not be changed during operation, but some parameters can not be changed regardless of the inverter is in what state.When changing the function code parameters,
please pay attention to the scope, units, and relative instructions on the parameter.
Besides, due to EEPROM is frequently stored, it will redUce the life of EEPROM, therefore under the communication mode some function code do not need to be stored and you just change
the RAM value.
If F group parameters need to achieve the function, as long as change high order F of the function code address to 0. If E group parameters need to achieve the function, as long as change
high order F of the function code address to 4. The corresponding function code addresses are
indicated below: high byte: 00 to 0F(F group), 40 to 4F (E group), 50 to 5F(B group),60 to 67(Y group)low byte:00 to FF
For example:
Function code F3.12 can not be stored into EEPROM, address indicates as 030C; function code E3.05 can not be stored into EEPROM, address indicates as 4305; the address indicates that
only writing RAM can be done and reading can not be done, when reading, it is invalid address.
For all parameters, you can also use the command code 07H to achieve the function. Stop/Run parameters section:
Parameter address Parameter description
1000 *Communication set value(-10000 to 10000)(Decimal)
1001 Running frequency
1002 Bus voltage
1003 Output voltage
1004 Output current
Appendix I
168
1005 Output power
1006 Output torque
1007 Operating speed
1008 DI input flag
1009 DO output flag
100A AI1 voltage
100B AI2 voltage
100C AI3 voltage
100D Count value input
100E Length value input
100F Load speed
1010 PID setting
1011 PID feedback
1012 PLC step
1013 High-speed pulse input frequency, unit: 0.01kHz
1014 Feedback speed, unit:0.1Hz
1015 Remaining run time
1016 AI1 voltage before correction
1017 AI2 voltage before correction
1018 AI3 voltage before correction
1019 Linear speed
101A Current power-on time
101B Current run time
101C High-speed pulse input frequency, unit: 1Hz
101D Communication set value
101E Actual feedback speed
101F Master frequency display
1020 Auxiliary frequency display
Note: There is two ways to modify the settings frequencies through communication mode:
The first: Set F0.03 (main frequency source setting) as 0/1 (keyboard set frequency), and then
modify the settings frequency by modifying F0.01 (keyboard set frequency). Communication mapping address of F0.01 is 0xF001 (Only need to change the RAM communication mapping
address to 0x0001).
The second :Set F0.03 (main frequency source setting) as 9 (Remote communication set), and then modify the settings frequency by modifying (Communication settings). , mailing address of
this parameter is 0x1000.the communication set value is the percentage of the relative value, 10000
corresponds to 100.00%, -10000 corresponds to -100.00%. For frequency dimension data, it is the percentage of the maximum frequency (F0.19); for torque dimension data, the percentage is F5.08
(torque upper limit digital setting).
Control command is input to the inverter: (write only)
Command word address Command function
2000
0001: Forward run
0002: Reverse run
0003: Forward Jog
0004: Reverse Jog
0005: Free stop
Appendix I
169
0006: Deceleration and stop
0007: Fault reset
Inverter read status: (read-only)
Status word address Status word function
3000
0001: Forward run
0002: Reverse run
0003: Stop
Parameter lock password verification: (If the return code is 8888H, it indicates that password verification is passed)
Password address Enter password
C000 *****
Digital output terminal control: (write only)
Command address Command content
2001
BIT0: SPA output control
BIT1: RELAY2 output control BIT2 RELAY1 output control
BIT3: Manufacturer reserves the undefined
BIT4: SPB switching quantity output control
Analog output DA1 control: (write only)
Command address Command content
2002 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%
Analog output DA2 control: (write only)
Command address Command content
2003 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%
SPB high-speed pulse output control: (write only)
Command address Command content
2004 0 to 7FFF indicates 0% to 100%
Inverter fault description:
Inverter fault address: Inverter fault information:
8000
0000: No fault
0001: Inverter unit protection
0002: Acceleration overcurrent
0003: Deceleration overcurrent
0004: Constant speed overcurrent
0005: Acceleration overvoltage 0006: Deceleration overvoltage
0007: Constant speed overvoltage
0008: Control power failure 0009: Undervoltage fault
000A: Inverter overload
000B: Motor Overload 000C: Input phase loss
000D: Output phase loss
000E: Module overheating
Appendix I
170
000F: External fault
0010: Communication abnormal
0011: Contactor abnormal
0012: Current detection fault 0013: Motor parameter auto tunning fault
0014:Encoder/PG card abnormal
0015: Parameter read and write abnormal 0016: Inverter hardware fault
0017: Motor short to ground fault
0018: Reserved 0019: Reserved
001A:Running time arrival
001B: Custom fault 1 001C: Custom fault 2
001D: Power-on time arrival
001E: Load drop 001F: PID feedback loss when running
0028: Fast current limiting timeout
0029: Switch motor when running fault 002A: Too large speed deviation
002B: Motor overspeed
002D: Motor overtemperature 005A: Encoder lines setting error
005B: Missed encoder
005C: Initial position error 005E: Speed feedback error
Data on communication failure information description (fault code):
Communication fault address Fault function description
8001
0000: No fault
0001: Password error
0002: Command code error
0003: CRC check error 0004: Invalid address
0005: Invalid parameters
0006: Invalid parameter changes 0007: System locked
0008: EEPROM in operation
F9Group - Communication parameter description
F9.00
Baud rate Default 6005
Setting range
Units digit: MODUBUS baud rate
0: 300BPS
1: 600BPS 2: 1200BPS
3: 2400BPS
4: 4800BPS 5: 9600BPS
6: 19200BPS
7: 38400BPS 8: 57600BPS
9: 115200BPS This parameter is used to set the data transfer rate between the host computer and the inverter.
Note: the baud rate must be set to the same for the host computer and the inverter, otherwise
Appendix I
171
communication can not be achieved. The larger baud rate, the faster communication speed.
F9.01
Data format Default 0
Setting range
0: no parity: data format <8, N, 2>
1: even parity: data format <8, E, 1>
2: odd parity: data format <8, O, 1> 3: no parity: data format <8-N-1>
Note: the set data for the host computer and the inverter must be the same.
F9.02 This unit address Default 1
Setting range 1 to 247, 0for broadcast address
When the address of this unit is set 0, that is broadcast address, the broadcasting function for the host computer can be achieved.
The address of this unit has uniqueness (in addition to the broadcast address), which is the
basis of peer-to-peer communication for the host computer and the inverter.
F9.03 Response delay Default 2ms
Setting range 0 to 20ms
Response delay: it refers to the interval time from the end of the inverter receiving data to the
start of it sending data to the host machine. If the response delay is less than the system processing time, then the response delay time is subject to the system processing time; If the response delay is
longer than the system processing time, after the system finises the data processing, and continues
to wait until the response delay time, and then sends data to the host computer.
F9.04 Reserved
Communication time-out parameter is not valid when the function code is set to 0.0s.
Whenthe function code is set to valid, if the interval time between one communication and the next communication exceeds the communication time-out time, the system will report
communication failure error (Fault ID Err.16). Generally, it is set to invalid. If the parameter can be
set to monitor the communication status in continuous communication system.
F9.05
Communication protocol selection Default 0
Setting range 0: non-standard Modbus protocol
1: standard Modbus protocol
F9.05=1: select standard Modbus protocol. F9.05=0: when reading command, the number of bytes returned by slave is more 1 byte than
standard Modbus protocol.
F9.06
Communication read current resolution Default 0
Setting range 0: 0.01A
1: 0.1A
Used to determine the current output units when communication reads output current.
172
第
十
章
Appendix Ⅱ Description on proportion linkage function
(this function available in C2.08 and above)
Ⅱ-1.Function Proportional linkage master:
Communication address of master =248 Proportional linkage slave:
Communication address of slave =1 to 247
If you want to use proportion linkage function, master parameters setting as follows:
F9.00 Baud rate Same as slave
F9.01 Data format Same as slave
F9.02 This unit address 248
Slave parameters setting as follows
F9.00 Baud rate Same as master
F9.01 Data format Same as master
F9.02 This unit address 1 to 247
FC.01 Proportional linkage
coefficient 0.00: invalid; 0.01 to 10.00
Slave output frequency = Master setting frequency * Proportional linkage coefficient +
UP/DOWN Changes.
Ⅱ-2.Examples of proportion linkage function Functions provided by proportional linkage system:
1. Master adjusts system speed via AI1 and controls FRW/REV run by using terminals;
2. Slave runs following mater, the proportional linkage coefficient is 0.90; (when it is powered on, master displays 50Hz, and slave displays 45Hz)
3. Slave receives the running speed command from master and save it into F0.01.
4. The actual setting frequency of slave can be fine-tuned by the operation of rising and falling of keypad or terminals.
5. The actual setting frequency of slave can be fine-tuned by the analog AI2 too.
6. The actual setting frequency of slave = F0.01 + slave AI2 analog trimming + UP/DOWN Changes.
Proportional linkage master setting:
F0.11 Command source selection 1: Terminal block control
F0.03 Frequency source master setting 2: Analog AI1 setting
F1.00 DI1 input terminal function selection 1. FRW run command
F1.01 DI2 input terminal function selection 2. REV run command
F9.00 Baud rate 6005
F9.02 Communication address of this unit Proportional linkage master 248
F9.03 Communication format 0
Proportional linkage slave setting:
Appendix II
173
F0.03 Frequency source master setting 0: keyboard set frequency
F0.04 Frequency source auxiliary setting 3: Analog AI2 setting
F0.07 Frequency overlay selection 01: master + auxiliary
F1.00 DI1 input terminal function selection 6. UP command
F1.01 DI2 input terminal function selection 7. DOWN command
F1.02 DI3 input terminal function selection 8: Free stop
F9.00 Baud rate Same as master
F9.02 Communication address of this unit 1 to 247
F9.03 Communication format Same as master
FC.01 Proportional linkage coefficient 0.90
Appendix II
174
Inverter
PI9000
+10V
AI1
GND
0 +10V
SG+SG-
COM
DI2
DI1
RS485Communication
Card
R
E
(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
R
S
T3-phase input
380V 50/60HzM3
E(PE)
1:FRW run command
2:REV run command
Inverter
PI9000
+10V
AI2
GND
0 +10V
SG+SG-
COM
DI3
DI2
RS485
R
E
(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
R
S
T3-phase input
380V 50/60HzM3
E(PE)
7:DOWN command
8:Free stop
Master
Slave1
DI16:UP command
Inverter
PI9000
+10V
AI2
GND
0 +10V
SG+SG-
COM
DI3
DI2
RS485
R
E
(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
R
S
T3-phase input
380V 50/60HzM3
E(PE)
SlaveN+1
DI1
VR1K/2W
VR1K/2W
VR1K/2W
7:DOWN command
8:Free stop
6:UP command
Communication
Card
Communication
Card
Diagram II-1 System wiring diagram
175
第
十
章
Appendix Ⅲ How to use universal encoder expansion card
(applicable for all series of Powtran frequency inverters)
Ⅲ-1 Overview PI9000 is equipped with a variety of universal encoder expansion card (PG card), as an
optional accessory, it is necessary part for the inverter closed-loop vector control, please select PG
card according to the form of encoder output, the specific models are as follows:
Options Description Others
PI9000_PG1
ABZ incremental encoder.
Differential input PG card, without frequency dividing output.
OC input PG card, without frequency dividing output.
5V,12V,24V voltage is optional, please provide voltage
and pulse input mode information when ordering.
Terminal
wiring
PI9000_PG3
UVW incremental encoder. UVW Differential input PG card, without
frequency dividing output.
5V voltage
Terminal wiring
PI9000_PG4 Rotational transformer PG card Terminal
wiring
PI9000_PG5
ABZ incremental encoder.
OC input PG card, with 1:1 frequency dividing output.
5V,12V,24V voltage is optional, please provide voltage
and pulse input mode information when ordering.
Terminal
wiring
Ⅲ-2 Description of mechanical installation and control terminals function
The expansion card specifications and terminal signals for each encoder are defined
as follows:
Table 1 Definitions of specifications and terminal signals
Differential PG card(PI9000_PG1)
PI9000_PG1 specifications
User interface Terminal block
Spacing 3.5mm
Screw Slotted
Swappable NO
Wire gauge 16-26AWG(1.318~0.1281mm2)
Maximum frequency 500kHz
Input differential
signal amplitude ≤7V
PI9000_PG1 terminal signals
No. Label no. Description
1 A+ Encoder output A signal positive
2 A- Encoder output A signal negative
3 B+ Encoder output B signal positive
4 B- Encoder output B signal negative
5 Z+ Encoder output Z signal positive
6 Z- Encoder output Z signal negative
7 5V Output 5V/100mA power
Appendix Ⅲ
176
8 GND Power ground
9 PE Shielded terminal
UVWdifferential PG card
PI9000_PG3 specifications
User interface Terminal block
Swappable NO
Wire gauge >22AWG(0.3247mm2)
Maximum frequency 500kHz
Input differential
signal amplitude ≤7V
PI9000_ PG3 terminal description
No. Label no. Description
1 A+ Encoder output A signal positive
2 A- Encoder output A signal negative
3 B+ Encoder output B signal positive
4 B- Encoder output B signal negative
5 Z+ Encoder output Z signal positive
6 Z- Encoder output Z signal negative
7 U+ Encoder output U signal positive
8 U- Encoder output U signal negative
9 V+ Encoder output V signal positive
10 V- Encoder output V signal negative
11 W+ Encoder output W signal positive
12 W- Encoder output W signal negative
13 +5V Output 5V/100mA power
14 GND Power ground
15 -
Rotational transformer PG card(PI9000_ PG4)
PI9000_PG4 specifications
User interface Terminal block
Swappable NO
Wire gauge >22AWG(0.3247mm2)
Resolution 12-bit
Excitation frequency 10kHz
VRMS 7V
VP-P 3.15±27%
PI9000_PG4 terminal description
No. Label no. Description
1 EXC1 Rotary transformer excitation negative
2 EXC Rotary transformer excitation positive
3 SIN Rotary transformer feedback SIN positive
4 SINLO Rotary transformer feedback SIN negative
5 COS Rotary transformer feedback COS positive
6 COSLO Rotary transformer feedback COS negative
7 -
8 -
9 COSLO Rotary transformer feedback COS negative
OC PG card(PI9000_PG5)
PI9000_PG5 specifications
User interface Terminal block
Spacing 3.5mm
Screw Slotted
Appendix Ⅲ
177
Swappable NO
Wire gauge 16-26AWG(1.318~0.1281mm2)
Maximum frequency 100kHz
PI9000_PG5 terminal description
No. Label no. Description
1 A Encoder output A signal
2 B Encoder output B signal
3 Z Encoder output Z signal
4 15V Output 15V/100mA power
5 GND Power ground
6 A0 PG card 1:1 feedback output A signal
7 B0 PG card 1:1 feedback output B signal
8 Z0 PG card 1:1 feedback output Z signal
9 PE Shielded terminal
178
第
十
章
Appendix IV CAN bus communication card use description
IV-1.Overview CAN bus communication card is suitable for all series of PI9000 frequency inverters.Protocol
details,please refer to《CAN bus communication protocol》document.
IV-2.Mechanical installation and terminal functions
IV-2-1 Mechanical installation modes
Diagram IV-1 CAN bus communication card‟s installation on SCB
Diagram IV-2 CAN bus communication card‟s installation on LCB
Appendix IV
179
IV-2-2 Terminal function
Class Terminal
Symbol Terminal Name Description
CAN
communicati
on
CANH communication interface
terminal
CANcommunication input
terminal CANL
COM CAN communication power ground CAN card 5V power output
terminal P5V
CAN communication output
power
180
第
十
章
Appendix V Profibus-DP communication card use description
V-1.Outline 9KDP1 meet the international standard PROFIBUS fieldbus, powtran technology 9K series
inverter use it together to achieve the drive to become a part of fieldbus complete control of real
fieldbus. Before using this product, please carefully read this manual
V-2.Terminal function
V-2-1.DIP switch description DIP switch
position No. Function instruction
1,2
DP Card and the
drive baud rate selection
Bit 1 Bit 2 Baud Rate
OFF OFF 115.2K
OFF ON 208.3K
ON OFF 256K
ON ON 512K
3-8
Profibus-DP Communication
from the station
address
6 Binary Consisting of 64-bit binary address, more
than 64 outside the address can be set only by
function code. The following lists some slave address and switch settings
Address switch settings
0 00 0000 7 00 0111
20 01 0100
Table 2.1 DIP Switch Functions
V-2-2.Terminal Function 1)external communication terminal J4-6 PIN
Terminal NO Mark Function
1 GND Isolated 5V power ground
2 RTS Request to send signal
3 TR- Negative data line
4 TR+ Positive data line
5 +5V Isolated 5V power supply
6 E Ground terminals
Table 2.2 External Communication Terminal Function 2)PC communication interface SW1-8 PIN
Terminal NO Terminal identification Function
1 BOOT0 ARM boot select
2 GND Digital Ground
3 VCC Digital Power
4 Reserved Reserved
5 PC232T PC 232 communication transmitting end
6 PC232R PC 232 receiving end
7 RREST ARM Reset
8 GND Digital Ground
Table 2.3 PC Communication Terminal Function
Appendix V
181
V-2-3.LED Indicator Functions
LED Indicator Function Definition Description
Green Power Indicator If DP card and drive interfaces connected, the inverter
after power LED should be in the steady state
Red
DP Card and
inverter serial connection indicator
DP Card and inverter connected to the normal state of
the LED is lit, flashing indicates the connection is
intermittent (for interference), and drive off when a serial connection is unsuccessful (You can check the
baud rate setting)
Yellow DP Profibus master card and the
connection indicator
DP Profibus master card and connect normal state of
the indicator is lit. flashing indicates the connection is intermittent (for interference), and Profibus master is
off when connection is unsuccessful (you can check
the slave address, data formats, and Profibus cable )
- 182 -
第
十
章
Product Information Feedback
Dear user:
Thank you for your interest in and purchasing Powtran products! In order to better serve you, we want to be able to timely get your personal information and the related information of the
purchased Powtran products so as to understand your current and future further demand to Powtran
products, we would appreciate your valuable feedback. For your convenience, please visit our website http://www.powtran.com and then click "Technologies and Services"and "Download"
columns to submit your feedback information.
1) Download the update product manUals you need
2) View the technical information on products, such as operation instructions, specifications
and features, FAQ, etc.
3) Share application cases.
4) Technical advisory and online feedback
5) Feedback the product and demand information for via e-mail 6) Inquire the latest products and access to various types of warranty and extend additional
services
7) when the product is improved, the contents of this manual may be subject to change
without prior no.